Revit MEP 2010

Imperial Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 59 . 60 . 62 . 64 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 102

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 . 114 . 119 . 128 . 142 . 146 . 149 . 151

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 . 177 . 183 . 193 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 214

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 284 . 289 . 294 . 299

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 315

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a CAD Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 . 338 . 348 . 353 . 364

Contents | vii

viii .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files.Introduction In this tutorial. Finally. you learn how to create and set up an MEP project. 1 . You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks.

2 .

The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. electrical panels.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. such as duct. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. fixtures. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. 3 . What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. such as mechanical equipment. Add basic MEP elements. Germany. and plumbing fixtures. Add more detailed modelling elements. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. and piping. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. electrical. and plumbing engineering workflows.

but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. views. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. In this exercise. Create schedules. you can choose to save your work. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. your Training folder may be in a different location. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. Metric file names have an _m suffix. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. NOTE Depending on your installation. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. However. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. and sheets to document the project. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. templates. Metric: files for users working with metric units. as well as how to open and save them. and tags. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. such as templates and families. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. is located and accessed in the training files location. You do not design entire systems. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . when you add ductwork. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. After completing each exercise. When you install the training files as instructed. annotations. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. On the Contents tab. to provide a richer and more finished design. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. Contact your CAD manager for more information.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. however. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. For example. For example. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. When you open a training file. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. Create detail views. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. you learn where the training files are located. So.

2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. scroll down. click ➤ Save As.rvt) is selected. and click Save. and click the Training Files icon.rvt.rvt and make changes. You may close the file with or without saving changes. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. For Files of type. For example. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. and click Open. the Open dialog displays. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. a list of file types displays. you are prompted to save the changes. For File name. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. 4 Click the training file name.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. 3 In the right pane. double-click Imperial or Metric. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. Accessing Training Files | 5 . enter the new file name. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. select the folder in which to save the new file. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. and you can open any supported file type. 8 If you have made changes. if you open settings. verify that Project Files (*.

6 .

These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. quantities. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. In this case. As you work in drawing and schedule views. drawing sheets. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. hence.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. If you move the partition. drawings. the operation of the software is parametric. the parameter is one of association or connection. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. You learn the terminology. scope. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. ■ ■ 7 . the floor or roof remains connected. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. 2D and 3D view. sections. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. schedules. the hierarchy of elements. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. every drawing sheet. the door retains this relationship to the partition. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. and plans. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. If the length of the elevation is changed. In the Revit MEP model. and phases when you need it. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. and schedules required for a building project. In this case. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database.

boilers. and electrical panels. Datum elements help to define project context. and keynotes are annotation elements. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. For example. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. For example. sinks. For example. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. levels. sprinklers. They display in relevant views of the design. and 2D detail components. filled regions. They help to describe or document the design. grids. sinks. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. boilers. ducts. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. For example. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Examples include detail lines. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. dimensions. tags.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. walls and ceilings are hosts. sprinklers. ducts. For example. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. and electrical panels. When you change something. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. and reference planes are datum elements. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. dimensions. tags. For example.

such as roofs. Most often. schedules. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. you do nothing to establish these relationships. North . the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. programming is not required. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. first floor. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. families. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. In Revit MEP. Project: In Revit MEP. The project file contains all information for the building design. and so forth). section views. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. elevation views. top of wall. they are implied by what you do and how you draw.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . In other cases. For example. from geometry to construction data. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. and drawings of the design. and types. you can explicitly control them. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. However. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Often. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. views of the project. If you can draw. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. you must be in a section or elevation view. and ceilings. or bottom of foundation. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. To place levels. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. This information includes components used to design the model. By using a single project file. for example. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. floors. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols.

or layer the views to see only the one on top. Then experiment with them. and similar graphical representation. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. For example. hiding. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. such as a 30” X 42” title block. A type can also be a style. each in-place family contains only a single type. identical use. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. You can also display several project views at one time. For example. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. However. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. A type can be a specific size of a family. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. showing. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. Type: Each family can have several types. System families can be transferred between projects. System families include ducts. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. For example. With a few clicks. Unlike system and standard component families. and wires. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. pipes. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances).

you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. To return the panel to the ribbon. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels.

tools used for adding 2D information to a design.. tools used for editing existing elements. architect-specific tools. data and systems. project and system parameters. When working on the Modify tab. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. tools used for managing and modifying the current view. tools used for running analysis on the current design. then select what you want to modify. select the tool first. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. and settings. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. and CAD files.. and for switching views.

Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. displays frequently used tools. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). provides access to common tools. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. To keep a panel expanded. Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. For example. provides requested information. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. closes the application menu (double-click). a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. By default. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. when adding duct.

Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to... NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu. select a file to open. (Export) On the application menu. (Save As) export the current drawing. select a template and create a new drawing. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics ..The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands.. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name. click. (Open) save the current drawing. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu. such as Export and Publish.

family. (Print) access product and license information.. family.. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. saves a current project. enters selection mode and ends the current operation.. To enable or disable a tool item. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. annotation. and Walkthrough. or template file. click. or template file. (Publish) print the current drawing. (Licensing) close the file. Camera. to.. annotation. provides views including Default 3D. publish the current project. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. but is not enabled by default. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 .On the application menu.

In addition. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. workshared components. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. However. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. To hide the Status Bar. To show the Status Bar again. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. check the Status Bar. displaying the same information. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. This displays the command history in a list. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. Clear the Status Bar check mark. Starting with the most recent command. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Group. when you switch to another editing mode.To undo or redo a series of operations. When you are using a command. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. repeat the command. Clipboard. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. or the Family Editor. When you are highlighting an element or component. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. Modify. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components.

When you place an element in a drawing. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon.To cancel or exit the current command. select one or more elements of the same category. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. Place a Wall. On the Quick Access toolbar. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. click (Modify). for example. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. To change existing elements to a different type. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements.

(The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view.rvt. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view. click Training Files. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. After you are familiar with these tasks. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. In the following steps. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . For example.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. There are several ways to access zoom options. Zoom the view In the tutorials. 1 Click ➤ Open.

To modify or add snap increments. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. Modifying the View | 19 . 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. NOTE As you zoom in and out. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). use a zoom menu command to zoom out. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. this is referred to as a crossing selection. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. If you do not have a wheel mouse. When you release the mouse button. 9 To display SteeringWheels. on the Navigation bar. 6 Click in the drawing area. In the drawing area. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. 5 Click Zoom To Fit.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. the view zooms in on the selected area. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. click . Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again.

and click tin the Options dialog. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. 14 To exit the wheel. To define settings for SteeringWheels. For more information about SteeringWheels. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . press ESC. click the SteeringWheels tab. ➤ Options. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. moving the wheel to the desired location. As you move the mouse. and then using the Zoom tool again. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. Click and drag to orbit the design. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area.

When drawing or modifying an MEP design. Small blue dots. 2 Enter ZR. display along the ends. as shown. bottoms. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. called drag controls. Performing Common Tasks | 21 . Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans. After you are familiar with these tasks. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. and open Level 2 . Similar controls. and select the duct.HVAC Plan . it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. These are the drag controls. referred to as shape handles. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Performing Common Tasks In this exercise.Design. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan.

The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. In this example. click the Undo command. Move. 4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. or press CTRL+Z. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. 6 On the Undo menu. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. select the first item in the list. All changes you make to a project are tracked. on the Standard toolbar. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions.3 Click and drag the bottom control. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .

10 Move the cursor to the right. for example. Some commands. Performing Common Tasks | 23 . In this case. require 2 clicks to complete the command. you want to move the duct. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. and drag it to the left as shown. After selecting the element to move. and click again to specify the ending position. The duct is moved to the new position. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct.8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. as shown. such as Move and Copy. 11 With the duct already selected. click to specify the starting position.

Return. such as the Modify Ducts command. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical . Press ESC twice. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct.End a command Some commands. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. For example. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command.Supply. 13 To end a command. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. 14 Enter VG. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar. Select Mechanical . Click OK.

17 Close the file without saving your changes. Performing Common Tasks | 25 .

26 .

In that case. and geometry from the starting template. 27 . you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. system families. such as coordination review and interference checking. under Create new. use copy/monitor. such as ducts and pipes. You can either select a template from the template library. settings. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template.rte template. 6 Click OK. and click Open. click Browse. click Training files. and modify system settings. under Template file. such as the default project units and settings. Finally. 2 In the New Project dialog. the default building levels and standard views. you learn how to start a project from a template. select Project. New projects inherit all the families. and loadable families. 4 Select the i_Tutorial-Default. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. and open Imperial ➤ Templates. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. 5 In the New Project dialog. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. link files. create and manage views. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. You can choose from several templates.

9 Close the file with or without saving it. and open North. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. When you select the material. NH. ■ For Building Construction. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. For example. select Project template. you can select it now. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. (Browse). create another new project using the Construction template. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. For Location. In the Choose Template dialog. select Manchester. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. review the construction materials listed. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. select Level 1. under Energy Analysis. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 10 Using the same method. and select the Systems-Default_Imperial. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. Click Cancel. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. click (Browse). If you want to use a template other than the default. select School or University. navigate to Imperial Templates. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information.7 In the Project Browser. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. for City. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. for Energy Data. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. 8 In the drawing area. ■ ■ Under Create new. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. Click OK twice.rte template and click Open. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. click Edit. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. Click OK. click Browse.

ensure that Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. select Views. under Duct Settings. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. For Ground Wire Tick Mark. 24 In the right pane. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. and fire protection systems. 4 1/2". and 5 1/2". clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns.19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. plumbing. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. click Wiring. 11 1/2". Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. piping. 25 In the left pane. for 3/4". Click OK twice. 10 1/2". select Identity Data. for 3 1/2".rfa and I_Long Wire Tick Mark. 27 Click OK. click Rectangular. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. for 3 1/2". and demand factors for electrical systems. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. under Duct Settings. wiring. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog.rfa and click Open. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. Holding CTRL. 4 1/2". 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. 23 In the left pane. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. select I_Hook Wire Tick Mark. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. 26 In the right pane. 33 Click OK. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. power distribution systems. For Categories. 22 In the right pane. After standard settings have been established for an organization. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. Creating an MEP Project | 29 . click Sizes. under Pipe Settings. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. and 12 1/2". 5 1/2". click Round.

you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. To enable this coordination. select Sub-Discipline. Select Imperial\Arch Link Model_i. select Project. select Associated Level. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. From the Positioning list. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. Click Open. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. 38 Close the file. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. For Then by. select Family and Type. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. In addition.rvt. click Browse. under Template file.Origin to Origin. families. Notice that the file is saved as a template. click Training. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. 5 Click OK. select Auto . and groups that are contained in a project. Linking Projects In this exercise. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. You need to create the MEP model for the project. Select Ascending Click OK twice. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. under Create new. 2 In the New Project dialog. sheets. select View Name. 4 In the New Project dialog. For Sort by. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. For Then by.

The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. 8 If necessary, reposition elevations in the plan view as shown.

Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area, select the linked architectural model. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 11 In the Type Properties dialog, under Constraints, select Room Bounding. 12 Click OK. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North - Mech. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels.

Linking Projects | 31

16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 17 On the Options Bar, click Plan View types. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog, verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 19 On the left side of the view, click the level line for 03- Floor. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value.

24 Enter 12 and press ENTER. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2.

32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model, and when the monitored elements are not synchronized, warnings notify you of any violations. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed, a copied monitored element in the host project has changed, or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. Using the Copy/Monitor tool, you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements, which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. After copying, appears above the copied elements, indicating that a relationship is established, and that the copied elements are monitored. If you modify a monitored element, a warning message displays, indicating that an element has changed. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. 27 In the drawing area, highlight the linked model, and click to select the linked model. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. 29 In the drawing area, click the MEP level line labeled Level 1, then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2, level 3, and the level 4. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab, click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click By Host View. 34 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab:

For Annotation Categories, select Custom.

Linking Projects | 33

■ ■ ■

Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Levels. Click OK.

36 Click OK.

Creating and Applying a View Template
In this exercise, you create a view template and apply it to your project template. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 2 In the New View Template dialog, for Name, enter Mechanical View and click OK. 3 In the View templates dialog, under View Properties, for V/G Overrides RVT Links, click Edit. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click Custom. 5 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 6 On the Model Categories tab:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Model Categories, select Custom. Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Parking, Planting, Roads, Site, and Topography. Click OK.

7 Click OK twice. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North - Mechanical and click Apply View Template.

34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

9 In the Apply View Template dialog, under View Templates, select Mechanical and click OK.

10 Close the file with or without saving your changes.

Modifying System Settings
In this exercise, you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects; they are not saved to project files or template files.

Modifying General System Options
In this exercise, you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. These settings control the graphics, selection default options, notification preferences, journal cleanup options, and your username when using worksharing. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab. 3 Under Colors, select Invert background color, and click OK. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project.

5 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default.rte. 7 Click OK. Notice that the drawing area is black. 8 Click ➤ Options.

9 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab.

Modifying System Settings | 35

10 Under Colors, click the value for Selection color. 11 In the Color dialog, select yellow, and click OK. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. When an error occurs, the elements causing the error display using this color. 12 Click the General tab. 13 Under Notifications, specify the following options:
■ ■

For Save reminder interval, select One hour. For Tooltip assistance, select None.

14 Click OK. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 17 Press ESC to end the command. 18 Select the wall.

Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. However, the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. 21 Close the file without saving it.

Specifying File Locations
In this exercise, you specify default file locations. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files, including your default project template, family template files, and family libraries. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the File Locations tab. 3 Under Default template file, click Browse.

36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template.

TIP To view a template, you can start a new project with that template. Click and click Browse to select a template. 4 Click Cancel. 5 Under Default path for user files, click Browse.

➤ New ➤ Project,

6 In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the folder to save your files to by default, and click Open. 7 In the Options dialog, under Default path for family template files, click Browse. This path is set automatically during the installation process. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. However, there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path, such as in a large, centralized, MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 8 Click Cancel. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog, click Places. 10 In the Places dialog, note the list of library names. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. You can modify the existing library names and path, and you can create new libraries. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open, Save, Load, and Import dialogs.

When you are opening, saving, or loading a Revit MEP file, you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. In the following illustration, notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog.

Specifying File Locations | 37

➤ Open. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. templates. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. Load. or families. click My Library. and select it as the library path. and click OK twice. and change the name to My Library. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Save. and Import dialogs. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. and click (Browse). click the My Library icon. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library.11 In the Places dialog. click (Add Value). and click Open. 15 Under Library Name. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects.

and decal image files. 21 On the File Locations tab. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. click Places. click Edit. This path is determined during installation. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 27 Click OK. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. 5 In the text editor. 14 Click in the drawing area. (Remove Value) to delete the library. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. 12 Create a new project using the default template. 19 Click Cancel. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. enter sheetmtl-Cu.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. specify the new location here. click the Spelling tab. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. 9 In the text editor. view the current path. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. 23 Click 24 Click OK. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. click Edit. click OK. If you work in a large office. 2 In the Options dialog. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. If you want to relocate this path. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. 11 In the Options dialog. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. 3 Under Settings. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 22 Select My Library. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. select Ignore words in uppercase. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. such as bump maps. custom color files. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. 20 Click ➤ Options.

As you zoom in and out within a view. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . under Template file. click Close. 2 In the New Project dialog.. and enter 1 . and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default. click Browse. click OK. 21 Under Personal dictionary. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. click the Spelling tab. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. under Dimension Snaps. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. click File menu ➤ Save. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments.rte. 25 Close the file without saving it. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 19 In the Options dialog. 24 In the Options dialog. 18 Click ➤ Options. In this exercise. You can turn snap settings on and off. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. 20 Under Settings. click Restore Defaults. 22 In the text editor. you modify snap increments.17 In the Spelling dialog. 6 In the Snaps dialog. click Training Files. click OK. you modify snap settings. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. delete sheetmtl-CU. 4 In the New Project dialog. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4’ . click Edit. work with snapping turned off. 23 In the text editor.

After you click to place the object at the midpoint.7 Under Object Snaps. For example. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. enter SM. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. use the wheel button on your mouse. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. and move the cursor to the right. If you do not have a wheel button. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 4’ increments. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. While sketching. TIP To zoom while sketching. such as ZO to zoom out. click OK. zoom out until it does so. If it does not. deselect Chain. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. 10 On the Options Bar. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. This is the increment that you added previously. snapping reverts to the system default settings. 8 In the Snaps dialog. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1’.

18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. 19 Enter SM. Notice that snapping is once again active. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. Do not set the wall end point. If you move the cursor along the wall.14 Click to set the wall endpoint. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. and delete the value 1’ . the midpoint. it will snap to the endpoints. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. 22 Move the cursor downward. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 26 Close the file. and the wall edges. 25 Click OK. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. with or without saving it. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. and move the cursor to the right. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. and specify the wall endpoint..

43 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems. You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system.Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial.

44 .

you first configure the linked architectural model. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. After applying a color scheme to the zones. 45 . They contain information about the locations in which they are placed.autodesk. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. This system consists of a cooling tower. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. go to http://www. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. At the end of the tutorial. methodology. duct system and a hydronic piping system. and then you create a plenum level. By following the recommended workflow. After finishing each exercise. water source heat pump (WSHP). you design a mechanical system for an office building. If the tutorial training files are not present. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. As you create the mechanical system. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. In this lesson. you can choose to save your work. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. you will understand the process.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. you first plan the system. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. However. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. In this exercise. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010.

In this section.rvt. NOTE When working with a linked file. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_i. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. These components are defined in the architectural training file. and after the linked model highlights. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . This makes the architectural components (such as walls. under Constraints. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. select Room Bounding.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. and click OK. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. you add a level for plenums. not in the MEP training file. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Space Plan is highlighted. roof. indicating that it’s the active view. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. click Training Files. 1 In the Project Browser. click to select it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. ceilings. Next.

13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. those categories in the Project Browser are listed as question marks. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . Preparing Spaces | 47 . A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. enter 8'. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. 16 Press Esc. and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). Click Plan View Types. Because you have not yet specified the view classification or sub-discipline properties. verify that only Floor Plan is selected.6 In the Project Browser. and enter Level 2 Plenum. For Offset. and double-click West . 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). and click OK. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. offset by the Offset value (8' 0" ) above level 2. and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level.Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). 9 On the Draw panel. and in the Plan View Types dialog.MEP. The new level is placed. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level.

select Design. for Top. However. verify that 1/8" = 1'-0" is selected. Under Extents. In the next exercise. In this exercise. for View Scale. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. ■ Click OK twice. 20 In the Project Browser. select Level Above (Level 3). click Edit. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . for Level. Under View Depth. for View Range. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. enter 0. and for Offset. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. For View Classification. enter an Offset of 1' 0". you place spaces in areas of the building model. NOTE After finishing each exercise. and then place spaces in various types of areas. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Properties. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. For Cut plane. For Sub-Discipline. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . right-click Level 2 Plenum.Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. select MEP . Under Identity Data.Plenum. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. In this exercise. you can choose to save your work. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. right-click Level 2 Plenum. select Plenum Plan. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. and click Apply Default View Template. for Default View Template. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces.

You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_i.rvt.Space Plan is highlighted. For Offset. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . select Horizontal. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. For (Tag Location). 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. select New. walls. enter 0. select Level 2 Plenum. For Space. This specifies the vertical extent of the space. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. Placing Spaces | 49 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and ceilings). indicating that it’s the active view. For Upper Limit.

50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 14 In the drawing area. ensuring coordination between the files. enter 219. for Number. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 9 Select the space. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. enter Library. Click OK. Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum.7 Click to place the space. For Name. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view.

demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. and then click Modify. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. select Level 3. 18 Select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. enter 0. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. Placing Spaces | 51 . For Offset.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. For Upper Limit. 20 Click in the Library to place the space. 21 Using the method learned previously. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time.

23 Click OK. you place a space in a large corridor area. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing. and then split the space using a space separation line. under Energy Analysis. 25 Close the file with or without saving it. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise.22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared.

5 On the Options Bar. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. enter 0. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. and for Offset. and then press Esc.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. for Upper Limit. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files.Space Plan is highlighted. select Level 3. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .rvt. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_i.

open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. and press Enter. 10 Using the same method. 11 Close the schedule view. In the schedule. If you had modified the name and number in the schedule view instead. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . the plan view would have updated with the changes. which was numbered 219Q. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. and notice that the schedule updates with the changes. 9 In the floor plan. enter Corridor. as shown. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. change the space number to 216A. and scroll to the newly placed space. double-click the space name. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.7 In the Project Browser.

place a space in the lower area of the split space. 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor.15 Press Esc twice. Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . 16 Using the method learned previously. The new space is numbered correctly (216B). with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. 18 Close the file with or without saving it.

indicating that it’s the active view. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_i. click Training Files. and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown. Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing.Space Plan is highlighted. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . you place a space in a chase. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty). 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. If necessary. Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint.

and click Element Properties. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. For Number. for Upper Limit. 10 In the plan view. On the Options Bar. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. In the plan view. click in the chase area to place the space. right-click. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. select the space. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. 12 Click in the section view. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. and then click OK. select Level 3. 6 Enter VG. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. enter 4'. For Limit Offset. Under Identity Data. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. For Offset. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . but that the space does not fill the entire chase.4 Press Esc. expand Spaces. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Constraints. enter Chase. for Name. enter 0. select Roof Level. for Upper Limit. enter 225PC. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. select Interior and Reference.

select Space Tag With Volume. All spaces in the view are tagged. 15 Press Esc. In the next exercises. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. ceilings. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. and click OK. 17 Type ZF. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations.Space Plan. and maximize the view. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. under Loaded Tags. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. the space displays the volume up to the roof only.Bounding elements (such as walls. floors.

3 Right-click in the System Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone.rvt. it is automatically added to the Default zone. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). Notice that Default is currently the only zone. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. 1 In the Project Browser. After a space is placed in an area. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. ) or Viewing Zones in the System Browser | 59 . To display space reference lines. In this exercise. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. click View ➤ Zones.Zoning is highlighted.Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. you view and verify zones in the System Browser. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . which removes the space from the Default zone. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Reference. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. indicating that it’s the active view. under Spaces. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_i. click Training Files.

indicating that the space is occupiable. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. under Spaces. As you do this. and modify the zone properties. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click Finish Editing Zone. The Zone tool is active.5 In the System Browser. Instruction 221. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. you can add or remove a space from the zone. and verify the zones in the System Browser. the Edit Zone tab displays. 4 In the drawing area. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. To display space reference lines. under Energy Analysis. double-click 121 Cafeteria. Using the Edit Zone tab. and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and Electrical 220 spaces. you assign spaces to zones in the building. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_i. click Training Files. Next. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. The graphic in the System Browser updates.rvt. and a new zone is created.Zoning is highlighted. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. you assign spaces to a zone. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click Reference. select Occupiable. select Computer Lab 222.

Expand HVAC Zones. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line.In the System Browser. Instruction. type VG. To view the zone in the drawing area. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. select HVAC Zones. 5 With the drawing area active. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. you need to activate the zone visibility. Click OK.

11 Close the System Browser.West . 10 On the Edit Zone tab. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Zoning. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). for Name.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. under Spaces. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser.rvt. and click OK. indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. enter 2 . Rename the zone 7 Select the zone. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building. click Reference. 12 Close the file with or without saving it.TIP After you finish editing the zone. you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. 9 In the System Browser.Area B. under Identity Data. you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. In this exercise. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. To display space reference lines. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . click Finish Editing Zone. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . click Training Files. and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. and verify the zone in the System Browser.West . You activated zone visibility in the views. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_i. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. expand 2 .Zoning is highlighted.

5 Click in the Level 1 . click in the Level 2 . select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone.Zoning view. 10 Click Finish Editing Zone. and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired. 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone. zoom out. Verify that the distance is 1/2". 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Select Attached End.Zoning view to activate it. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected. Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 . and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone. 6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. 15 Press Esc. 9 With the Add Space tool active. 8 In the Level 1 . 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space.Zoning view.Zoning floor plan.

you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. on the ViewCube. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. Front. click the corner where the Top. you verify the building. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. enter Lounge .rvt. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. double-click the zone tag. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. for Name Value. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 . Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_i. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. double-click Level 1 . and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes.Zoning to make it the active view. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . click Training Files. space. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.East.Zoning view. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. In this exercise. and zone information. and click OK.

NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. and select 109 Lounge. verify that Wireframe is selected.4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). Using the Highlight tool. Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. you isolate the space. Click (Highlight). With 109 Lounge selected. ■ TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. Next. click (Isolate). you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Lounge. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. ■ Working with the Analytical Model | 65 .

For Electrical Loads. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. ■ ■ ■ Next. For People. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. and then click OK. All spaces in the zone display in isolation. scroll down in the left pane. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. select 1_South_Lounge. click . verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). For Construction Type. Next. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. the space information displays for the selected space. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. and then click OK. click . 6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. Below the list of spaces and zones. click . select 109 Lounge. and click OK. select Lounge/Recreation. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type.■ On the Details tab. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. verify that <Building> is selected. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and in the People dialog.

and humidification set point. Below the list of spaces and zones. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls.00 °F : 54. This indicates the outdoor air per person. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. heating air temperature. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. floors. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. 12 Using the methods learned previously. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. This indicates the heating set point.00 °F : 90. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. cooling air temperature. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids.Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Lounge. the zone information displays for the selected zone.00 °F : N/A is specified. This indicates the cooling set point. For Cooling Information. click (Shading). 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool.00 °F : N/A is specified. and dehumidification set point. roofs. verify that <Building> is selected. and other room-bounding components. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. outdoor air per area. Next. For Heating Information. and air changes per hour. verify that 74. verify that 70.

Because this is an unoccupied space. For Offset. For Name. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). Click OK. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. enter 212P. for Number. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. select Plenum. 15 In the Project Browser. select Level 3. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. click Cancel.Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. enter 0. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . select Plenum. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Under Energy Analysis. Under Energy Analysis. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. open MEP . 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. Modify space properties 19 Select the space.

verify that Manchester. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog.22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. NH. double-click Level 2 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Edit. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. select School or University. click Training Files.rvt. On the Place tab. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis.Space Plan. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_i. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. click in the Value field. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. under Energy Analysis. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. enter 03101. and select space Plenum 212P. you verified building. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. For Postal Code. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . for Energy Data. for City. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. and zone information. For Location. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. is selected. space. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. and verify that the space has replaced the void.

after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. a cooling load. enter 200 Btu/h. ft. this option adjusts the times automatically. For Project Phase.When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. you need to select this option. For Condition Type. 8 In the drawing area. For Ground Plane. select Heated and cooled. select space Library 219. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. verify that <Building> is specified. For Latent. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. For Sliver Space Tolerance. under Volume Computations. For Building Construction. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. Click OK twice. both. and then click . enter 150 Btu/h. For Sensible. ■ On the Weather tab. verify that New Construction is selected. select Library . right-click. or neither. ■ In the Type Properties dialog. For Space Type. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. If. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). select Specified. for Building Service. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . for Values. Under Heat Gain (per Person). and click OK. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. verify that 1' 0" is specified. and click Element Properties. for Values. verify that Level 1 is selected. and click OK. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. Select Area per person. click Edit. click in the Value column. verify that Occupiable is selected. For People.Audio Visual. In order to select a space. For Export Complexity. and enter 50 sq. select Specified. and click OK.

Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. Click OK twice. For Building Service. and click to learn the cause for the warning. Under Power. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. select Actual. NH. and under Heating Information. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. You should correct the space error in the building model. For Building Construction. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. and can be modified here. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. verify that Heating Set Point is 70°F .■ ■ ■ Click OK. verify that Manchester. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. is specified. verify that <Building> is specified. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). There should be no warnings displayed. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. select 219 Library. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. and click OK. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. click Calculate. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. click Information). If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. For Electrical Loads. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. You have verified the building information. select Actual. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. for Values. Next. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. click Edit. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. for Values. For Location. 12 Click the Details tab. verify that School or University is selected. Select the space associated with the warning.

4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. weather. space. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes.rvt. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. 16 After you review the loads report. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. select HVAC Zones. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. 17 In the loads report. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. In this exercise. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. click to the right of the building to place the legend. Notice that the space information was automatically updated.Space Plan. click Training Files. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. 3 In the drawing area. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. space. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 19 In the drawing area.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. 21 Click OK. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. Click OK. For Color Scheme. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_i. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. or make any changes to the model. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. and a loads report displays. indicating that it’s the active view. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. and zone information for the building model. or zone information. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. 15 Review the loads report for project. select 219 Library. under Energy Analysis.

Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . select Tonnage Range. Notice that the cooling load is based on tonnage value. You want a scheme that allows for a greater tonnage range. and click OK. in 1-ton increments. under Schemes. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. The new scheme displays in the view. Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. select the color scheme legend.5 Zoom in to the legend.

open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type. add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view.The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. 11 Using the method learned previously.

Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. select Spaces. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities.Space Fill is the active view. enter Space Airflow Schedule.rvt. If you select Show categories from all disciplines. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. select Spaces. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. In the next exercise. select New Construction. Click OK. For Name. for Select available fields from. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . you create a schedule for the supply air system project. click Training Files.12 Close the file with or without saving it. For Phase. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. more category options are available. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. In this exercise. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. Select Schedule building components.

■ ■ Using the method learned previously. For Formula. for Formula. For Fields. select Calculated Supply Airflow. enter . For Type. ■ Click Calculated Value. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. select Not Between. Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. For Discipline. Click OK. and then click . select Level. select Airflow Delta. and then click Conditional Format. Select Formula. enter Airflow Delta. For Then by. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ For Test. and then select Hidden field. In the Fields dialog. click (Browse). select Air Flow. Select Ascending. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range.■ Under Available fields.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . select Level. select HVAC. and Blank line. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. select Number. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. In the Schedule Properties dialog. Header. In the Calculated Value dialog. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. and click OK.

select red. enter -25 CFM and 25 CFM. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. In this exercise. In the next lesson. For Background Color. click the color swatch. a view opens that contains the selected space. and click OK. verify that Show is highlighted. ■ The schedule displays. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -25 to 25 CFM. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range.■ ■ ■ For Value. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . right-click to access schedule properties. In the Color dialog. In later exercises. Click OK twice. Under Conditions to Use. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel.

78 .

As you place the air terminals. After system creation.Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. you modify air terminal parameters. Then. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. and work with the airflow schedule. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. In this lesson. you size ductwork and validate your air system design. After completing the air systems lesson. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. you will create supply air systems. 79 .

4 Click in the schedule view to make it active. indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. click Training Files. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule. and scroll to space 223.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. the space crossing lines display. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 3 In the ceiling view. Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_i. When you highlight a space using the cursor.

18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. 13 On the Options Bar. for Flow. 9 On the Placement panel. and select Supply Diffuser . 8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. The schedule updates with the new flow data. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected.Hosted from the Type Selector drop-down. Also. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . verify that Constrain is cleared. click Place on Face. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. and then select both Copy and Multiple. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. and press Enter. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. If the host element is modified or moved. 15 On the Options Bar. the hosted elements are updated as well.Hosted : 24"x24" Face 8" Neck . Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly.Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. as shown.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. and press Enter. enter 425 CFM. Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. select the diffuser. and then press Esc to end the command.Rectangular Face Round Neck . 17 Move the cursor down. which in this case is the ceiling grid. type 12. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal.

clear Leader. Next.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. 28 On the Placement tab. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 425 CFM. 22 In the drawing area. 27 Select Return Diffuser . As you place the return diffusers. 29 Place 2 diffusers. and then press Esc. navigate to Training\Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\Diffuser Tag. 24 In the Open dialog. click Place on Face. select each of the 5 supply diffusers. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. 21 On the Options Bar. select one of the diffusers. click Yes.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. and click Open. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range. 25 In the drawing area. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. as shown.rfa. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object.

35 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click to select the lines. and click OK. under Other. 32 In the Project Browser. click Yes. Level. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. 31 In the alert dialog. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . for Reference. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. select one of the return diffusers. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. as shown. select Strong Reference.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area.

37 In the Family Already Exists dialog, click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan, zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 40 In the drawing area, select the vertical grid line as shown.

41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown, and then select the top edge of the diffuser.

43 Using the same method, align the other return diffuser, as shown, and then press Esc twice.

44 While pressing Ctrl, select both return diffusers, and on the Options Bar, for Flow, enter 650 CFM310 CFM, and press Enter. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left, right-click, and click Element Properties. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical, clear LeftArrow, and click OK.

84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

47 Using the same method, clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser.

48 Close the file with or without saving it.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals
In this exercise, you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. As you place the air terminals, you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_i.rvt.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85

Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser, expand HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design to make it the active view. 2 On the View Control Bar, for Scale, click 1/8" = 1'-0". 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115, at the lower left corner of the building. When you highlight a space using the cursor, the space crossing lines display, and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule, and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 8 In the Type Selector, select Supply Diffuser - Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 - 8 Neck. 9 On the Options Bar, verify that Tag on Placement is selected. 10 In the drawing area, click to place the air terminal in the space as shown, and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. Also, the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing, the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. As a result, your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. 11 Select the diffuser, and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Modify the diffuser properties:

In the Instance Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Offset, enter 8'. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level, the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. Under Mechanical - Airflow, for Flow, enter 360 CFM. Click OK.

■ ■

86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

13 With the diffuser still selected, click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser, move the cursor down, type 20', and then press Enter. 15 Press Esc. By copying the diffuser, you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag.

16 Using the same method, select both air terminals and copy them 14' to the right.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87

Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 18 On the Options Bar, clear Leader. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers, and then press Esc. Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type, type, mark, and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it, and then right-click in the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Other, for Embedded Schedule, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

Select Embedded Schedule. For Category, select Air Terminals, and then click Embedded Schedule Properties.

23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click System Type, Type, Mark, and Flow. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Mark. 25 Click OK 3 times. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range, it is a negative value. Next, you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure.

88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. 26 Using the method learned previously, tile the windows. 27 In the schedule, under space 115, select SD 1-12-110. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule, for Flow, enter 450 CFM, and press Enter. 29 Using the same method, change the flow for SD 1-12-111 and 112 to 330 CFM. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project, because you are modifying the digital database of building information. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).

The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89

Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule, and maximize Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design. 31 In the drawing area, select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. As you highlight the zone, pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone, as shown.

32 Open the Instance Properties dialog, and under Energy Analysis, verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 33807 Btu/h and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 3.9 ton (approximately 1.5 times the heating load). 33 Click OK. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 35 In the Type Selector, select WSHP - Horizontal - High Efficiency - 2-5 Tons - Left Return - Right Discharge : 4 Tons. 36 In the drawing area, zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command.

90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

for Constraints ➤ Offset. enter 9' 0"2750. and verify the height of the WSHP: ■ ■ Click Modify tab ➤ Inquiry panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Measure Between Two References. For the start point. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 . Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. click to select the midpoint of the bottom of the WSHP. Verify that the measured distance is 9'. ■ ■ For the end point. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. 44 Zoom in to space 115. and click OK.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. click the Level 1 line.

When you highlight a space.Design is highlighted. including energy analysis. and click View ➤ Systems. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.rvt. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components.Press Esc. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. the space crossing lines display.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . In this exercise. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . In the left pane of the Open dialog. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses.HVAC Plan . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_i. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones. click Training Files. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. You then create the logical connection between the system components. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. verify that Design ➤ HVAC . IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. However. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. right-click the title. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. indicating that it’s the active view. After creating the logical connection. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser.

All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. review the Number of Elements. 15 Click Cancel. 11 In the drawing area. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. Note that the Flow value (1700 CFM) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. Connect Into. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System.IMPORTANT In the System Browser. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . the number of elements is updated. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. On the Options Bar. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. 6 Keep the System Browser open. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. and Flow value. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. 12 In the System Browser. System Name. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. As you add diffusers to systems.

highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. and the system connects them. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .17 Using the method learned previously. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. 18 Click OK. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. which updates the name in the System Browser. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. In this exercise. the air terminals are the children. 22 Click OK. In this exercise. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. access system properties to see that the flow value (2125 CFM) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. 25 Click OK. for Mark. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. for System Name. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. under Mechanical. 26 Click Finish Editing System. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Identity Data. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. Rename the system Next. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. and display solution 1. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 5 On the Options Bar. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). select the upper left diffuser. In this case. for Solution Type.HVAC Plan. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. which provides various layout tools. indicating that it’s the active view. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_i. click Training Files. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. the space crossing lines display. the Network type provides several solutions.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. A Generate Layout tab displays. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 .Design is highlighted. When you highlight a space using the cursor. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 4 In the drawing area. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. select Network. Also.rvt. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles.

10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. click Settings. Select Branch.7 On the Options Bar. For Duct Type. enter 9' 10 1/2". For Maximum Flex Duct Length. 9 On the Generate Layout panel. enter 9' 10 1/2". enter 3'. as shown. and use the drag control to drag it just to the left of the lighting fixtures. Click OK. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . select Flex Duct Round : Flex . select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. you’ll get an error in a later step. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. For Flex Duct Type. For Duct Type.Round. For Offset. click Modify. For Offset.

All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. or manually modify the duct. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. or offset elevations are incorrect. For example. select a different layout solution. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . as is the elbow itself. Either relocate the system components. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created.11 Click Finish Layout. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork.

for Color Scheme. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. for Values Displayed. and click to select it. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. Usually. a disconnection exists. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . the branch to which the duct is connected highlights.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. select By View. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. but not all values are used in this view. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. If the entire network does not highlight. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. fittings. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend.Flow. Using a flow-based color scheme. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. and then click OK. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. and click OK. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. highlight a segment of the main duct. under Graphics. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. thus it is not part of the system. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. and equipment. The first time you press Tab. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. select Duct Color Fill .

select the color scheme legend. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. and click OK. note the Air Flow value (2125 CFM). 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and press Enter. for Flow. and then press Esc to clear the selection. decrease the flow value by 100 CFM. 26 Click OK. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. and on the Options Bar. for Schemes. 20 In the drawing area. 21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP.Airflow. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . select the WSHP. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. under Mechanical .Velocity. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. select one of the diffusers in the system. select Duct Color Fill .

and drag it to the right. Under Constraints. Select the upper segment of main duct.Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. and select 16". highlight a segment of the duct. select Calculated Size Only. select Friction. The ductwork and fittings are updated. Select Only. click Cancel. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. and enter . 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. Select Restrict Height. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Click OK. for Branch Sizing. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP).08 in-wg/100ft. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. and then click to select it. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it.

33 Move the cursor over the system components. so that you can modify the system design accordingly. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. pressure. Use the information that displays (flow. static pressure.Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 101 . 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. and pressure loss. Using this tool. and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them.

click Training Files. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. also known as the critical path.NOTE As you inspect a system. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_i. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 35 Click Finish.

5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location.Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors).Design is highlighted.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel.HVAC Plan . and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Beveled Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and click Draw Duct. 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner. indicating that it’s the active view. 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers. and select the WSHP. 6 Click midway between the 2 top light fixtures to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct. and click to specify the end of the main duct.

select the top right diffuser. The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. select 9' 10 1/2". Front. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown.8 Press Esc twice to end the command. Click this corner Resulting view orientation 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . for Offset. right-click the connector grip. NOTE When drawing duct. 15 On the ViewCube. double-click MEP .3D MEP. 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. click the corner where the Top. 14 In the Project Browser. and click Draw Duct. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. 11 On the Options Bar.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system.

16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. The ductwork is automatically created. in space 115. select the top unconnected supply diffuser. the color fill indicates the flow value. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). 22 Using the same method. Also. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. 18 Make the floor plan the active view. it is considered a closed loop. and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. 19 In the drawing area. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into.

A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. Branch ductwork in 3D Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. zoom in to the open end of the main duct. 24 Select the remaining diffusers.Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. and select the top left diffuser. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 25 Press Esc. You can ignore the warning.

Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). and then click Modify. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. and click to select it. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. 28 Select Rectangular Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. 30 Press Esc twice.To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 .

37 Press Esc to clear the selection. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate CFM value for the system. select a segment of the main duct. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. 40 Using the same method. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. 108 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and then click OK. under Constraints. Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. clear Restrict Height. such as a plenum. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. and click OK.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. for Flow. under Mechanical . 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. 41 Close the file with or without saving it.Airflow.

or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. Then. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. including 2 base mounted pumps. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. and a cooling tower located on the roof. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. Automatically and manually lay out piping. 109 . additional water source heat pumps from level 1. Create return and supply piping systems. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. In this lesson.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.rvt.Level 3 mechanical piping system Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_i. 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . on level 3 of the building model. click Training Files. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler. you place mechanical equipment. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing. NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view. 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component.Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser.2-6 Tons . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 7 On the Options Bar.Horizontal . verify that Wall faces is selected.Design is highlighted.Right Discharge : 6 Ton from the Type Selector drop-down. indicating that it’s the active view. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 .HVAC Plan . 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building. in corridor 328. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .High Efficiency . 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component.Left Return . A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number. as shown.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . and select WSHP .

) 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click to place the dimension. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first. 10 Select the WSHP. and enter 2'. verify that the WSHP is still selected. 11 Press Enter and then press Esc. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed. click the top edge of the WSHP. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. click the dimension. as shown. and in the Type Selector. as shown.8 Click the corridor wall face.

Click OK. for Water Flow. Under Mechanical. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. as shown. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. for Offset. enter 12 GPM. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 .14 Click Modify. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. enter 9'. and select Condensing Boiler : 500 MBH from the Type Selector drop-down. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. select the 2 WSHPs. and click to place it in the mechanical room. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection.

21 Click Modify. Create the logical connection between the system components. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. Create pipes to physically connect the system components. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. you create the return and supply piping systems. including flow and pressure. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .Design is highlighted. where it is easier to review the information. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. but without a corresponding system. 5 In the System Browser. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Mech 330). Unlike logical connections (systems). 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline. right-click the Systems column heading. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. Creating a Piping System | 115 . click Training Files. You can create pipes to connect system components. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building. and click View ➤ Piping. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_i. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. indicating that it’s the active view.IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system.HVAC Plan . analyses cannot be performed.

In the System Browser. This display indicates that the system is selected. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. select the boiler. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. As you assign equipment to systems. 12 In the drawing area. for System Name. Notice that on the Options Bar. select the 2 WSHPs. 9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Assigning a system component to an existing system. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. Therefore. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. and the Edit System tool is not active. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. 10 On the Options Bar. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. the System Equipment is Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. while pressing Ctrl. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations.

HVAC Plan . under Design ➤ HVAC . (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. Creating a Piping System | 117 .13 Click Finish Editing System. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply. You have created the hydronic return system. 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it. for System Name. and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply. 17 On the Options Bar. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. 19 In the Project Browser.Design. 18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. and select the cooling tower.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. double-click Roof .

The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). 23 Close the roof plan view. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. In heating mode. 26 Click Finish Editing System. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. indicating the logical connection. The hydronic supply system highlights in red. and bypasses the cooling tower. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. and click OK. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. In cooling mode. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. and click Expand All. 25 Select the boiler. 29 Right-click CHWS. 28 Using the same method.22 In the Select Connector dialog. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. and click Select. the boiler supplies heated water to the system. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select Connector 1 : Undefined : Round : 4'' : Cooling Water Supply In. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. expand the Hydronic Return system category.

right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. and click Column Settings. including the flow rate and size of the component. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. enter 18 GPM. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. 32 In the System Browser. for Water Flow. expand Piping. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. You also manually modify the layout path as required.In the System Browser. and click OK. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. you can view several parameters. and click OK. and click Properties. under Mechanical.

9 In the Select a System dialog.rvt. 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. In the left pane of the Open dialog. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. you can place the cursor over a system component. A system preview displays in red. click Check None. and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red).Mech 330). click Training Files. select Mechanical Equipment. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. and click to select it. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Notice that all components within the Level 3 . and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . select CHWR. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. press Tab to highlight the system. 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. the boiler.HVAC Plan . 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. then the Select a System dialog displays. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_i.HVAC plan view range are highlighted. When you draw a box to select components. 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. indicating that it’s the active view. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Design is highlighted. 5 In the Filter dialog. 10 Click OK. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP.

15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. or architectural components.11 On the Options Bar. structural beams. duct. For Inset. enter 1' 6''. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 10' 0''. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. click Settings. It does not reference the architecture. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. 13 Click Cancel. select Perimeter. verify that Solutions is selected. ■ ■ Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 .

17 Optionally. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. 19 In the drawing area. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. to display the path with thinner lines. With each Tab. and press Tab 3 times. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. and the flow for the other is 12. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. Verify the flow In a previous exercise. the flow for one WSHP is 18. 18 Place the cursor over the piping. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed.16 Click Finish Layout. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

and access its instance properties. 24 Press Esc. notice that the Water Flow is 30 GPM. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (18 GPM + 12 GPM). 23 Under Mechanical. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and click OK. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. verify that the value for Flow is 30 GPM. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . 22 Select the boiler. under Mechanical.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. and click OK.

32 Click Finish Editing System. which propagates flow throughout the system.Design ➤ Floor Plans.26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. the Number of Elements is now 8. 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System. 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Next. On the Options Bar.Design. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR). Logically. 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. double-click Level 1 . 28 In the Project Browser.HVAC Plan . 27 On the System Tools panel. 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. click Edit System. Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below. you physically close the CHWR loop. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .

The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 95 GPM. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . access its instance properties. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. 35 Using the drag control. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap.34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. so the total flow of 125 GPM indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. note that the value for Flow is 95 GPM. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 30 GPM. 38 Using the same method. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. and click Cancel. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 125 GPM. Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Mechanical. as shown. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. select a WSHP.

select Perimeter 1 of 5. enter 0''/12''. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution.40 In the Select a System dialog. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. For Slope. 45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. 41 Click OK. 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and then click OK. select CHWS. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. enter 1' 6''. Click Settings. enter 9' 6'' for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. For Inset.

as shown. as shown. 46 Click Modify. 48 While pressing Ctrl. 47 In the drawing area. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 127 . In a later exercise. (Both sections are at the same elevation.The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path.) 49 Select the 4-way arrow control. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected.

select a different layout solution. and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing.50 Using the same method. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. To create the piping system. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. or manually modify the pipe. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. Add piping to close the supply loop. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. Either relocate the system components. or offset elevations are incorrect. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. 51 Click Finish Layout. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe).

3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. double-click 3D HVAC Building. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_i. As you work in the training file. indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. as shown. and the return pipes are magenta.NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog.Design is highlighted. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 . click Training Files.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .Design ➤ 3D Views.HVAC Plan . you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC . Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.

7 In the plan view. select the section of piping. draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. as shown. 6 Press Delete.

select the boiler.8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 9 In the 3D view. 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. ■ Click to move the piping. ■ Move the cursor up 4''. Click to specify the reference point. and press Esc to clear the selection. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 .

11 In the Select Connector dialog. 13 In the plan view. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. select the return pipe riser. and click OK. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select the boiler. and click Draw Pipe. 12 In the 3D view. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. and the lower one is secondary. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 2'' : Cold Water In. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. and the boiler is connected to the return piping. The connections are automatically created. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings.You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. Add another 2' section of pipe to the right. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. enter 1' . the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments.7''. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and press Enter. ■ Move the cursor down. enter 2'. and you select 1 connector.In a plan view. for Offset.

and click OK. 18 Press Esc twice. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 19 In the plan view. Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. As you place piping runs that are close together. select Connector 2 : Undefined: Round: 3''. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 21 In the Select Connector dialog. as shown. and select it.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. select the primary base mounted pump. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. and the appropriate fittings are created.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 . zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. right-click the bottom connector. and click Draw Pipe. and click to draw the pipe. you select the tee fitting. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. click to connect to the pump. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. 27 Move the cursor to the right. 29 If necessary. and click the minus symbol. and when the connector point displays. 28 Press Esc. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow.24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee.

Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. enter 4'. and click Draw Pipe. select the primary base mounted pump. for Offset. 31 On the Options Bar. 33 Press Esc. right-click the discharge connector. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click to create the pipe.

35 Using the method learned previously.Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump. upgrade the fitting to a tee connector. these pipe connections were created automatically. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 . as shown. 3D view of parallel-connected base mounted pumps Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view.

type 1'. enter 9' 6''.36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown. right-click the bottom control on the tee. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. ■ Move the cursor down. and press Enter. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. and click Draw Pipe. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click to create the pipe. for Offset.

right-click. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 . and click Element Properties. you validate the flow through the system. You now have a closed loop system. Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. Next.37 Click Modify.

140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click OK. notice that under Mechanical. Connect the cooling tower Next. for Cooling Water Flow. view the properties for the secondary pump. The flow is being propagated through the piping. which is rounded up to 63 GPM (1/2 of 125 GPM). as shown. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. under Mechanical. the value is 0 GPM.39 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Element Properties. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. notice that Flow is 125 GPM. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . When you create the pumps in parallel. 41 Using the same method. select the cooling tower. ■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). 43 Press Esc. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. 48 In the plan view. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. right-click. 40 Click Cancel. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors.50 or 50% of the Flow. 42 Click OK. under Mechanical. 44 In the 3D view. 46 Press Esc. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. In the Instance Properties dialog. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system.

NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 . 49 Press Esc.■ Lower pipe (outlet). Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system.

and close the dialog. You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower. the water bypasses the cooling tower. When the valve is open. click Training Files. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_i. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. Adding Valves In this exercise. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. select the cooling tower. 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 125 GPM. and is heated by the boiler. 52 Close the file with or without saving it.50 In the 3D View.

The bypass valve is closed by default. Adding Valves | 143 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. 8 Press Esc twice.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . and select Ball Valve . 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve. as shown. 4 On the Options Bar. verify that the Diameter value is 3''. indicating that it’s the active view. 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower. Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.Design is highlighted. and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position.HVAC Plan . 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel.

10 Press Esc.2-6 Inch Bypass : 4'' valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower. place another Ball Valve .2-6 Inch : 4'' from the Type Selector drop-down. 15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower. 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 14 Using the same method. parallel to the previously placed valve. 12 Select Ball Valve .

under Mechanical.Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. 20 Select the bypass valve.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower.2-6 Inch : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler. You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode. right-click. Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). verify that Flow is 0 GPM. 19 Using the same method. For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog. and select Ball Valve . and click Element Properties. and click OK. In heating mode. Adding Valves | 145 . (This valve allows the water to flow through it. validate that the Flow value is 0 GPM. and select Ball Valve . validate the following flow values: ■ ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower).

The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 23 Close the file with or without saving it. indicating that it’s the active view.rvt. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 125 GPM. Sizing Pipe In this exercise. click Training Files. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters.22 Using the method you just learned. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing.HVAC Plan . 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Design is highlighted. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_i. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend. Initially. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 GPM. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately. as shown. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system. Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 GPM. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.

and click OK.4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. and click OK. 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected.Size. This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods.Flow. This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. for Schemes. 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 8 Press Esc to clear the selection. select Pipe Color Fill . Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend. and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. click Pipe Color Fill . Sizing Pipe | 147 .

enter 5 FPS.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. select Friction. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. Under Constraints. Click OK. and for Velocity. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. and enter 2. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. select Larger of Connector and Calculated.25 FT/100ft. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). Select And. and click to select the branch. for Branch Sizing. 13 Press Esc.

Design ➤ 3D Views. Either relocate the system components. select a different layout solution. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. 14 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_i. and double-click 3D HVAC Building. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. click Training Files. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. or manually modify the pipe.IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. Using the System Inspector. pressure. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. Inspecting the System In this exercise. Inspecting the System | 149 . The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. or offset elevations are incorrect. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level.

Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. This information helps you modify the system design. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. flow. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. An inspection flag reports the section number. as required. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. and pressure information including pressure loss.3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector.

10 Click Finish. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. targeting those systems that need attention. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. Note that the Flow is 80 GPM. 9 Using the same method. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. and notice that the Static Pressure is 7.67 psi. and click OK.65 psi and the Pressure Loss is 1. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project. and to size pipe.Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open. and the Pressure Loss is 1.88 psi.89 psi. you need to validate them. the Static Pressure is 7. for Fluid Temperature. Checking Piping Systems | 151 . select 90° F. inspect Section 6 again. In this exercise. as shown.

and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. 4 In the System Browser. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. click Training Files. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. and double-click Level 3 . As you learned when placing components. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty.Design.HVAC Plan . Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. After you assign components to a system. 9 Right-click CHWS. 8 Expand Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. 6 In the Project Browser. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .HVAC Plan . expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH is listed. and click Show to view all of the system components. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked.Design.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Design ➤ Floor Plans. 7 In the System Browser. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. For example. After you have assigned all components to systems. the pipe is associated with that system. right-click the Systems titlebar. double-click Level 1 . under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Warnings display. If you place components without assigning them to a system. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments.Design ➤ Floor Plans.rvt. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. and click View. and for pipe sizing. In the System Browser. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. thus assigning the components to a system.

click Close. and confirm unassigned system components. 14 Using the methods that you learned. 15 Close the file with or without saving it.TIP If you have multiple views open. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components.HVAC Plan .Design floor plan. 13 Right-click CHWR. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. 12 In the System Browser. confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. otherwise. Checking Piping Systems | 153 . right-click Hydronic Return. and click Expand All. 10 Using the same methods. and select Level 3 . expand the Unassigned folder. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems.

154 .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system. 155 .Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial.

156 .

you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system. Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels. Define required lighting.Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 157 .

enter 1. ■ ■ For Material. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. In this exercise you review electrical settings. 158 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . click (Open). select 75. speeding up the design phase. For Temperature. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_01_i. enter THHN. Click OK. You also add a wiring type. ■ ■ For Factor. ■ Click New Correction Factor. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. As you place components and create circuits. For Material. select 90.rvt. expand Wiring .Wire Sizes. select Copper. Select Correction Factor. click Training Files. select Copper.04.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. For Temperature Rating. and demand factors that are applied in the design. select Wiring Types. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. distribution systems. wiring.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Insulation, select THHN. For Max Size, enter 2000. For Neutral Multiplier, enter 1.0. Select Neutral Required. For Neutral Size, select Hot Conductor Size. For Conduit Type, select Steel.

Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane, select Voltage Definitions. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. By specifying a range, you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 240. For Value, enter 240. For Minimum, enter 220. For Maximum, enter 250.

Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane, select Distribution Systems. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 120/240. For Phase, select Single. For Wires, select 3. For L-L Voltage, select 240. For L-G Voltage, select 120.

Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane, select Demand Factors. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Load Classification, select Power. Under More Than, select 10000 VA. Click Split. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor, enter 50. Click OK.

11 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces.

Specifying Electrical Settings | 159

Defining Required Lighting
In this exercise, you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building, such as offices, restrooms, and conference rooms. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level), then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. In this case the key style is the type of space and, because the key is linked to your new project parameter, its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. Later in the tutorial, you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_02_i.rvt.

Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Required Lighting Level. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type of Parameter, select Illuminance. For Group Parameter Under, select Electrical - Lighting. Under Categories, select Spaces. Verify that Instance is selected. Click OK twice. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces, under the Electrical - Lighting group in the space element properties.

Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 5 In the drawing area, zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218.

6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

7 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Electrical - Lighting, note the Required Lighting Level parameter. Click OK. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 9 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Requirements. Select Schedule Keys, and for Key Name, enter Lighting Levels. Click OK.

10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click Required Lighting Level, and click OK. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text.

Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row, enter Open Office. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column, enter 45. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed.

16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. 17 Complete the table by entering the following:

The fc value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type, which is mapped to project units. Notice that as you enter the data, the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level.

Defining Required Lighting | 161

Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

For Sort By, select Required Lighting Level. Select Blank Line.

21 Click OK twice. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level.

22 Using the same method, change the sort order back to the default setting. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element.

25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note that under Electrical-Lighting, that Required Lighting Level is blank. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Lighting Levels, select Instruction-Standard. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 50 fc and the field is dimmed, since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. The

162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key, select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value, or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter, the value input applies only to the selected space. 27 Click OK. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog.

28 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules
Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. In this exercise, you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. Later in this exercise, you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value, which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_03_i.rvt.

Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Schemes, for Category, select Spaces. Under Schemes, click (Duplicate).

3 In the New Color Scheme dialog, for Name, enter Required Lighting and click OK. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Scheme Definition, for Title, enter Required Lighting Levels. For Color, select Required Lighting Level, and click OK to dismiss the alert message.

5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:

Under Scheme Definition, verify the By Range is selected.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 163

Select the scheme for At Least 20.00 fc, and click (Add Value). This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. For example, if you select the value for 20 fc and click Add, then the new value will be 40 fc. If you select the value for 20 fc again and click Add, then the new value will be 30 fc or half of the difference between the two values you are adding.

With the scheme for At Least 20. 00 fc still selected, click

(Add Value) again.

Select the scheme for At Least 40.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

■ ■ ■

Select the scheme for 30.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

Select the scheme for 50.00 fc, enter 75.00, and press ENTER. Select the scheme for 40.00 fc, enter 50.00, and press ENTER.

Click OK.

Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting CF. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 8 In the drawing area, click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Space Type, select Spaces. For Color Scheme, select Required Lighting. Click OK.

The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created.

164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 11 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK.

12 In the Schedule Properties dialog, for Available Fields, double-click Number, Name, Level, Average Estimated Illumination, and Required Lighting Level. 13 Click Calculated Value. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Lighting Delta. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type, select Illuminance. For Formula, click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Average Estimated Illumination. Click OK.

In the Calculated Value dialog, for Formula, at the end of Average Estimated Illumination, press the spacebar, type a hyphen, and click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Required Lighting Level. Click OK twice.

15 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Level. Select Header. Select Blank Line. On the Formatting tab, for Fields, select Lighting Delta. Click Conditional Format.

In the Conditional Formatting dialog, under Condition, for Test, select Not Between.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165

16 Close the file with or without saving it. select Red. The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -5 fc and 5 fc are highlighted in red. enter -5 fc and 5 fc. for Custom Colors.■ ■ For Value. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . Click OK three times. ■ ■ In the Color dialog. Click Background Color.

you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. Then. First. power circuits. as you place lighting fixtures. 167 . you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. Create a panel schedule. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. Use the System Browser to check your design. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. Create power loads. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels.

Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. In the Color dialog. click (Open). then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks.rvt. select the color for Less Than 20. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. By using orange as the color for this range. You can create additional color schemes. Under Scheme Definition. ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. select Orange. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. select the color legend.Lighting Color Fill view is open. Click OK. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements.00 fc. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 20. 168 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 . and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_i. for Basic Colors. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 2 In the drawing area. select Average Estimated Illumination. for the Spaces Category.00 fc.

Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 169 .5 fc range. 8 In the Project Browser. which is the lowest value in the specified range. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner.277VM_Plain Recessed Lighting Fixture 600x600 . all three of these colored fields will clear to white. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 13 Click the Level 2 . As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field.5 fc range is satisfied.7 In the Project Browser. indicating a value greater than 0 fc. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x2’ (2 Lamp) . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order.277. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met. zoom to space Library 219. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update. The red field will clear once the +/. The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active.Lighting Ceiling plan. 10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. Note that the lighting delta can be cleared. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture.

19 Press ESC to end the command. 20 Select the lighting fixture. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. 25 On the Options Bar. select Multiple. 18 Click to place the fixture.The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. the fixtures will move accordingly. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 170 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 23 Click OK. In the Space Lighting Analysis view. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated.

27 Press ESC to end the command. select the 3 fixtures. 30 On the Options Bar. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. select Multiple. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown. 28 In the drawing area. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 171 .

32 Press ESC. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Note the value in red for the space Library 219. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically. Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures. 33 Click to activate the Schedule window.

click Check None. 36 In the Filter dialog. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 .35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Click OK. and for Category. 37 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (2 Lamp) . select Lighting Fixtures.277V.

38 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view.The values in the schedule are updated automatically. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Note the changes for the space Library 219.

277V. The lighting delta is satisfied. Note the changes for the space Library 219.39 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) . 41 On the Options Bar. 42 In the drawing area. click the ceiling grid line as shown. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175 . 40 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. select Multiple Alignment.

44 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures.43 Click the left edge of the first fixture. The fixture aligns. 176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

you modify the light fixture IES files. you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. 46 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures In this exercise. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_i. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 177 . In the next exercise.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click (Open).45 Press ESC to end the command. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.

Lighting Color Fill plan. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Click Edit Type.Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Tile the views as shown. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 .Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 . Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting .Lighting Plan. scroll to view space space Library 219. 178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Note the Average Estimated Illumination value of 46 fc. 3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view.

In the Select File dialog. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated.00 lm. Note the lighting type has changed to F14.■ In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate. Apply the lighting fixture type 8 Select all the fixtures in the center column in the Library as shown. Under Photometrics. for Ballast Loss Factor. for Type Mark. select 463T5_S. for Name enter 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. select Xenon and click OK. click the value for Light Loss Factor.00 VA. Under Identity Data. enter . Note that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule. for Color Preset. ■ Click Apply. ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical Loads. select Luminous Flux. and click OK. enter 162.ies and click Open. enter F15. ■ Click OK twice. ■ Under Photometrics. Under Electrical. for Lamp. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. Under Photometrics. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. select T5 [HO].93.85. Click OK. In the Name dialog. Under Photometrics. click the value for Initial Intensity. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 179 . ■ In the Initial Color dialog. click the value for Initial Color. specify 15000. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. for Apparent Load. enter .277V and click OK.

Click OK. Remove lighting fixtures 13 Select the 3 lighting fixtures in the center column of the Library as shown. 180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . select Lighting Fixtures. and for Category. 10 In the Filter dialog.277V. 11 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . and that the lighting delta for the Library in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule also has been updated.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. click Check None. 12 Press ESC to deselect the fixtures. Note that the selected lighting fixtures have been updated.

Press Delete. 15 In space Library 219. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181 . Note the lighting delta updates again. 16 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 14 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. select the top center fixture.

Note that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Remove lighting fixtures 18 Select the 2 lighting fixtures as shown.17 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command.

click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.Press Delete. and Receptacles | 183 . Placing Switches. junction boxes. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. Junction Boxes. you add switches. Placing Switches. click (Open). The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. The lighting delta has been updated and is now 0. and receptacles to your design. In the next exercise. Junction Boxes. 19 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the drawing area. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_i. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project.

Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared . Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host.3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Wall Occupancy Sensor . it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. 7 Click to place the switch. 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown. 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .277V.

Junction Boxes. and Receptacles | 185 . The element type Junction Boxes .NoLoad.rfa and click Open. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown.NoLoad: 4” Square is selected in the Type Selector. 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. 9 Press ESC to end the command. Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 12 In the Load Family dialog. Placing Switches. browse to Revit MEP ➤ Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices. Select Junction Boxes .8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown.

enter JB-1NL. note the Number of Poles is 1. Click OK twice. note that Apparent Load is set to 0. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . enter 9’0”. In the Type Properties dialog. NOTE When entering values. zoom to space Library 219. for Mark. you can enter a space to separate the unit values. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints.Offset. Click Edit Type. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data.14 Press ESC to end the command. Under Electrical. 21 In the drawing area. Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. 15 Select the junction box. for Level 2 . 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

Click OK. Select Size. 24 For any column. Select Load. Expand General.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. and Number of Elements. Space Name. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. 26 In the System Browser. right-click and click Column Settings. Space Number. and Voltage. and Receptacles | 187 . This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. NOTE If necessary. Placing Switches. Expand Electrical. 23 In the System Browser. Distribution System. Junction Boxes.

35 Select the dimension and enter 12’. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown.27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 31 Close the System Browser. 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right.

and Receptacles | 189 . select Copy and Multiple. Placing Switches. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 40 On the Options Bar.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle. 38 Select the receptacle. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. Junction Boxes.

41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. 42 Move the cursor down. move the cursor along the wall. enter 12’ and press ENTER to place another receptacle. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and enter 12’ and press ENTER.

Placing Switches. Junction Boxes.43 Press ESC to end the command. and Receptacles | 191 .

Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown. 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face.

Next you create lighting circuits and show wire. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans.48 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. you need to create logical connections to define the topology. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 .

You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). and work toward the higher voltage. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click (Open). click Training Files. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. Adding wiring to a project is optional. 2 In the drawing area. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_i.equipment.rvt. zoom to the space Electrical 220. In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open.

select 120/208 Wye. for Distribution System. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical .Surface: 100A. 5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. select 480/277 Wye. For Panel Name.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . 9 On the Options Bar. #1 Pole Breakers. for Distribution System. enter 20. 14 Select the panelboard. Click OK. 8 Select the panelboard. enter PP-2B. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. for Max. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 7 Press ESC to end the command.4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select 208V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Loads. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. 15 On the Options Bar.

20 In the drawing area. click Check None. enter LP-2B. For Panel Name. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. #1 Pole Breakers. which is the logical connection between the elements. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. enter 20. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard.17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical .Loads. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. Click OK. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. for Max. 23 In the Filter dialog. Click OK. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and for Category. Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. zoom to space Instruction 221. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power.

27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc.25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 26 Select lighting panel LP-2B. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 . The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel.

31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown. Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting.28 Press ESC to end the command. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 32 Press ESC. 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Lighting Switches: Three Way. 33 Select the switch on the right.

Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 .34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select Lighting Switches: Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down. 35 Select the left three-way switch. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit.

39 Select all items in space Instruction 221. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . for Hot Conductors. click (Open).37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 38 Press ESC to end the command.Loads. Click OK. click Check None. select Wires. 41 In the Filter dialog. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. 40 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. except without wire. Next you create circuits without showing wire. 42 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 43 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. and for Category. Click OK. enter 2. Note that the tick marks are updated to show 4.

expand Power. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.rvt. and Voltage Drop are selected. Voltage. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. Distribution System. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_i. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. Click OK. and then expand circuit 1. 13 In the System Browser. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. click Training Files. Rating. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. Expand Electrical. and verify that Load.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the drawing area. right-click on the Systems heading. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. ■ 16 In the System Browser.

Click OK. 30 Close the System Browser. 18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 22 With the junction box still selected.Note the circuit in space Instruction 221. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. Note the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. change the Voltage to 277V. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. under Electrical. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222.

38 In the Instance Properties dialog. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and Vertical ➤ Top. under Identity Data. 40 Click OK twice. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. 35 Press ESC to end the command. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. 47 In the drawing area. Click Yes. enter FR4. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. note the label parameters and click Cancel. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. Click Tags. Click OK. click below the first one to place it. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 .Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. select Lighting Fixture Tag: Standard. for Type Mark. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. click Edit Type. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader.

enter Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. 59 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. Click Save. Click OK.48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. 56 In the Filter dialog.rfa. Next you create a switch system. select Break. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. enter a comma. For Circuit Number. Deselect Break and for Suffix. 61 Close the file with or without saving it. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. click Check None. 55 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. Click OK. 52 In the Save As dialog. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . Note the tag is updated in the drawing area. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . select Lighting Fixture Tags. for File Name. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. 58 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. Click OK. 57 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. and click Apply. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Add tags to remaining fixtures 54 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. 60 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. and for Category.

click Training Files.rvt.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. enter a. 12 Select the occupancy sensor. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 2 In the drawing area. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. Creating a Switch System | 205 . 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click (Open). 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_i. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. Note that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. under Electrical Lighting. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. for Switch ID. Click OK. 9 Select the occupancy sensor. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. zoom to space Computer Lab 222.

206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. under Electrical . for switch ID. 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. Click OK. Note the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System.Lighting. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch.15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. enter b. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog.

rvt. click (Open). 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_i. Next you create a circuit and size wire. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 4 In the Filter dialog. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. click Training Files.26 Close the file with or without saving it. click Check None. lighting. Click OK. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). 7 In space Electrical 220. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating Power Loads | 207 . Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. select Electrical Fixtures. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a pick box to select all the components in the space. Circuits are used for power. and data systems. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. 2 In the drawing area. and for Category. select the PP-2B panel.

18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. 15 In the Load Family dialog. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. navigate to Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. for Hot Conductors. and click Open. 19 Click OK. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. and in the right pane. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. select Long Wire Tick Mark.rfa. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. and click Element Properties.8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. select Wiring. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. and in the drawing area. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. enter 2. 13 Select the wire again. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. Click OK. under Electrical . 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Ground Wire Tick Mark.Loads.

as shown. and click to select the circuit. select the PP-2B panel. Creating Power Loads | 209 . Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222.The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. 21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. 22 In space Electrical 220.

click the connector of the first receptacle. Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. in space Instruction 221. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown. There are only 3 tick marks 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 28 In the drawing area. 29 In space Instruction 221. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc.26 Press Delete. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. as shown. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221.

click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_i. zoom to space Electrical 220. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. Next you balance the loads for your design. 3 In the Electrical space. 2 In the drawing area.on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. Finally. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. 31 Close the file with or without saving it. select panel LP-2B. click Training Files.rvt. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.

Phase B 3636 VA.4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. 6 Click OK. click Rebalance Loads. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. and Phase C provides 2028 VA. enter 30A. 1-#10. B. Scroll down. ■ ■ Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. while Phase B provides 2004 VA. 14 Close the warning dialog. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. for Rating. Notice that the loads on Phase A. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. The loads are now more evenly distributed over the three phases (Phase A . 12 Select panel PP-2B. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. Click OK. Under Electrical-Loads. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties.3616 VA). 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. 1-#12. and C shows an imbalance with the heaviest load 6932 VA on Phase A.3712 VA. 1-#10. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. 1-#12. and Phase C .

under Electrical . 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. Next you create a panel schedule. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule.Loads. Click OK. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. under Electrical . enter 25A. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. and click OK. for Rating. The Panel Schedule Report appears in a new window. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_i. and click OK.rvt. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. Select PP-2B. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. 24 Select the transformer TP-2B. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. enter 30A. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties.Loads. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. click (Open). 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. 17 Close the warning dialog. for Rating. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. click Training Files.15 Select panel PP-2B. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open E601 . Under Header Text. Under Header Text. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. for Font Size. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . for Appearance. click Edit.Panel Schedules. Under Body Text.NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. 7 Select the schedule. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. drag PP-2B onto the sheet. select Bold and Italic. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. select Berlin Sans FB. 8 Click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. for Font Size. Next you use the System Browser to check your design. expand Sheets (all). The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. click (Open). under Other. 6 In the Project Browser. enter 1/8. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_i. 11 Click OK twice.rvt. for Font. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. 4 Close the report. click Training Files. 10 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. 5 In the Project Browser. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. enter 3/32. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog.

note that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 2. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. Checking Your Design | 215 . The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. Note the receptacle in space Lounge 212. select space Lounge 212. There are 4 devices connected to circuit 2. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall and press TAB once. each with a load of 180VA. notice that PP-2C for circuit 2 is updated. In the System Browser. Notice that the receptacle on the right side wall is not connected to circuit 2. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. press TAB once. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. In the System Browser.View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. 12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 11 Select the receptacle on the right side wall. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. Expand Unassigned.

20 On the Options Bar. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 23 Close the file with or without saving it.14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. for Panel. 216 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 15 In the dialog. 17 In the drawing area. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. select MDP-1. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 18 Select panel LP-2C. under Warnings. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. 16 Close the details dialog. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. zoom to space Electrical 214.

217 .Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system.

218 .

Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. you create a PVC pipe type. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design is open. and click OK. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type. planning is critical to a successful design. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. click Training Files.Vent.rvt. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. click Duplicate.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 4 In the Name dialog. Adding a pipe size. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_i. 2 In the Project Browser. In this lesson. in addition to loading existing families. 219 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. In this exercise. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. right-click PVC . You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. type PVC . and verify that Level 1 .Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project.Sanitary. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Plumbing Plan . Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping. and click Properties.

and click Main. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . and click OK. select Branch. For Offset. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings. select Tee Reducing Double Vent .Sch 40 . select Sanitary. for Nominal. 22 Click New Size. Cross. click Modify. select Sanitary. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. enter 27/32''. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. and open Imperial\Families\Trap P . enter 10°.PVC . 18 For System Type. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. enter 1/2''. click Pipe Settings.Sch 40 . 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. Tap. 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. 27 For the new pipe size. 6 Click OK. refer to Revit MEP Online Help. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. for Material.DWV.0''.PVC . for Pipe Connector Tolerance.rfa. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 15 For System Type.DWV: Standard. select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary.DWV: Standard. select None. 10 On the Selection panel. click Training Files.Vent is listed. Tee. 13 In the right panel. under Mechanical. select Tee Vent . 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. 24 For Inside Diameter. In the Project Browser. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 25 For Outside. 17 In the left pane. enter -4' .Sch 40 . NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. select Tee. PVC . 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. enter 5/8''. select Plastic. under Pipe Types.PVC . 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. 21 In the right pane.5 In the Type Properties dialog. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. 26 Click OK.

Create the hot water system. Create the cold water system. 221 . Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. add a hot water heater. and hot and cold water piping. including plumbing fixtures. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. sanitary piping. Create the sanitary plumbing system. vent.

NOTE To identify a space name and number. as shown. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise. click Training Files.Design is open.Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise. Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser.Plumbing Plan . 1 urinal. you add 2 toilets. 222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .rvt. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_i.Design ➤ Floor Plans. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. including the men’s room (space Male 107). and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information. and verify that Level 1 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan.

1.The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected.Flush Valve . against the left wall. under Water Closet .Wall Mounted. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223 .6 gpf. 1 wall-mounted urinal. in the Type Selector. 4 On the Element panel. as shown. 5 On the Placement panel. and 3 sinks. centered on the bottom horizontal reference line. select Public .

and press Esc. above the first in the standard toilet space. select 3/4'' Flush Valve. zoom in closer. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces.7 Click to place another toilet. under Urinal . (Again. use the reference line to center the fixture. 224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .Wall Hung. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line. Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector.) 8 Press Esc.

you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. 12 On the Placement panel. select 5''x5'' Strainer .Rectangular. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 6'' and 6'' from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas). click Place on Face.2'' Drain.Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector. In placing the fixture. 14 Click Modify. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225 . under Floor Drain .

you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets. and a floor drain. and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_i. a urinal. and review the components listed under this system. 226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. 20 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder.rvt. 17 If all disciplines are displayed. 16 Click the title bar for the browser. right-click in the System Browser table heading. 19 Expand Default Sanitary. and Default Domestic Cold Water. 18 Expand the Unassigned folder. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. click Training Files. Creating a Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors).Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and click View ➤ Piping. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet. In this exercise.

8 In the Filter dialog. 2 In the Project Browser.Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. verify that Plumbing Fixtures is selected. Creating a Sanitary System | 227 . 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views.Plumbing Plan . clear Lines (<Overhead>). 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and verify that Level 1 .Design ➤ Floor Plans.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner.Design is open. Only plumbing fixtures are selected. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 6 In the plan view. draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room.

click Finish Editing System. 10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors. If you deselected the drain. expand Sanitary. the Create Cold Water System option would also be available. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system. and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. 11 On the Options Bar. enter Sanitary 107. 12 On the Edit System panel. 13 In the Systems Browser. 228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . for System Name. and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted. so the Create Sanitary System is available. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. You include the bathroom space number in the name.9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary.

a toilet. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. at the midpoint of the detail lines. for example. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . as shown. select one of the components in the system. A preview of the piping layout displays. The base is placed. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. select Sanitary 107. 16 In the Select a System dialog. and click OK. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout.

The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. and modify it to meet project requirements. for Offset. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. enter 1/8'' / 12''. 26 On the Options Bar. and for Offset. 27 Click Modify. for Diameter. enter -1' 0''. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. 21 On Options Bar. select Branch. 24 In the left pane. The default settings are automatically modified. 25 On the Options Bar. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. select Main. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. and click Settings. for Slope. click Solutions. enter -4'-0”. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. select 4''. enter -1' 0''. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. You accept this suggested solution. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. select Intersections. for Solution Type. and click OK. 23 For Offset.19 On the Options Bar. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point. 29 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow). select the vertical route path segments. Creating a Sanitary System | 231 .Customize the suggested layout 28 While pressing Ctrl.

use the ViewCube to orient the view. and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. 31 Click Modify. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . as shown. 32 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets. as shown.30 In the 3D view.

34 On the Generate Layout panel. click Finish Layout.33 Using the previous method. Creating a Sanitary System | 233 . adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet.

■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 36 Click to select the fitting to the drain. select the fitting and click to reorient it. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity.Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing view. 35 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. When a fitting is reversed. and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation.

The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. as shown.37 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. you continue with the work from the last exercise. adding sinks in the men’s room. 38 Close the file with or without saving it. and check the slope control. and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 .

Design ➤ Floor Plans.Design is open. 5 On the Placement panel.Plumbing Plan .rvt. in the Type Selector. 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 4 On the Element panel.Rectangular. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. select 22''x22'' . and verify that Level 1 . as shown. click Training Files. under Lavatory .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Public. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107). 6 Click to place the sink centered on the top horizontal reference line. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_i. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .

7 Click Modify. ■ Move the cursor up above the top reference line. select Multiple. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 . Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point. On the Options Bar. For example. enter 2' 4''. in this step you can enter 2 4 (two space four) to specify 2' 4''. TIP When entering dimensions. without having to enter ' and '' symbols. 8 Select the sink. you can enter a space to separate the value for feet and inches. and press Enter to create a second sink.

Press Esc. 12 In the drawing area. 11 In the System Browser. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. click Finish Editing System. 16 On the Edit System panel. and press Enter to create the third sink. click Add To System. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen.■ ■ Enter 2' 4''. Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 15 Click the 3 sinks. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 .Design ➤ 3D Views. notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. under Design ➤ Plumbing . 22 In the plan view. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. double-click 3D Plumbing. and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal. as shown. 19 In the 3D view. 21 Select the tee. right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). use the ViewCube to orient the view. and click Draw Pipe. 20 Select the fitting. with the tee fitting selected.In the System Browser.

the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. In this example. and click to draw the pipe. and click Apply. 24 On the Options Bar. enter 2' . 26 On the Options Bar. for Offset. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . NOTE Piping is displayed according to color filters specified in the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. piping connected to the sanitary system displays in olive green. press Spacebar. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. 27 Click Modify.6''. for Slope. When you press the Spacebar. enter 1/8'' / 12''.23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option.

3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 29 In the Type Selector. select Standard.Sch 40 . and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks. move the cursor over the stub pipe.DWV. 32 Select the double wye fitting. under Wye 45 Deg Double .PVC . 31 Click Modify. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 . 30 In the 3D view. and when the vertical center line displays. click to place the fitting.

enter 6''. you add pipe segments to the double wye. In the next steps. 34 Press Esc. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 37 Select the fitting. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. for Offset. and press Enter. and click Draw Pipe. and press Enter. on the Options Bar. zoom in to the double wye fitting. double-click the section head to open the section view. right-click the right connector. 36 In the section view. enter 1'.33 With the fitting selected.

43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 . 42 Click Modify. and click to place the pipe. 41 Using the same method. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. as shown. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. 40 Click Modify.Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool.

244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and press Esc. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. draw a 6'' pipe for the other 2 sinks. 47 Move the cursor down. press Spacebar. enter 6''. and click Draw Pipe. 48 Click Modify. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. 46 In the section view. right-click the bottom connector. 49 Using the same method.

You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps. 52 In the plan view. 51 In the Type Selector.DWV.50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 56 Using the same method. place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks. select Standard. and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping. click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 . You can see in the 3D view that it is connected. 55 In the 3D view. 53 Using the same method. rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks. under Trap P . select the P-Trap on the left.PVC .Sch 40 . 54 Click Modify.

246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . select the left P-Trap.. Move the cursor to the left. and click Draw Pipe. 58 Using the same method. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. Select the double wye pipe on the left. Click Modify. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink. and press Enter.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. Click in the plan view. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. In the plan view. enter 6''. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. connect the right sink to the double wye.

as shown. while pressing Ctrl. under Pipe Types. select PVC Sanitary. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . click Finish to select the recommended solution. On the Routing Solutions panel. In the Type Selector. Press Esc. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. and select a proposed solution. select the section of pipe you just drew. while pressing Ctrl. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye.■ In the 3D view. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks.

you continue with the work on the sanitary system. click Training Files. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. You have appropriately sloped the pipe. adjusting the sanitary stack. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_i. for Slope. 65 Close the file with or without saving it. click Finish. and verify the slope. verify that 1/8'' / 12'' is selected. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. 63 On the Slope Editor panel. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 62 On the Options Bar.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.

Floor level line. as shown. 10 In the 3D view.Plumbing Plan . and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing. 9 In the Type Selector. 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee.Design. 3 In the Section view. and click the intersection to place the fitting. 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 7 On the Selection panel. and click Draw Pipe. select Standard. Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 38. select the vertical stack. right-click the top connector. 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and click to draw the pipe.Design. and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . under Wye Combination with 8th Bend .Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser. select the elbow fitting on the right.PVC . Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 . 5 Select the tee.Overall. click Modify.Sch 40 .DWV.

under Plug . 15 Press Esc. enter 1'-0”.11 Click Modify. 14 On the Options Bar. as shown. 12 Select the fitting. and click the rotate control to change the orientation. 18 In the plan view. 250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe. Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.PVC . select Standard. for Offset. 17 In the Type Selector.Sch 40 .DWV. 13 Click the rotate control once.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Creating the Cold Water System In this exercise.Design is open. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Plumbing Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans. Creating the Cold Water System | 251 . click Training Files. Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_i. you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system.rvt. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks. and verify that Level 1 . In the left pane of the Open dialog.19 Click Modify. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout.

252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . minimize the Sanitary system. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. To minimize opportunities for piping interference. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog. double-click 3D Plumbing . select Branch.Design ➤ 3D Views. select Domestic Cold Water. expand Unassigned. for System Type. you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping. 6 In the left pane.Overall. and click Main. 7 In the left pane. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. 15 In the plan view. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector. urinal. 17 In the Filter dialog. and click OK. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. draw a selection box to select the toilets. select Main. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. select Domestic Hot Water. and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. under Design ➤ Plumbing . Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser.2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . select Pipe Types: Water. enter 9' 3''. for System Type. and sinks. 9 In the left pane. click Check None. select Plumbing Fixtures. 14 In the System Browser. select Branch. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type. if necessary. 4 In the right pane.) 10 Click OK. select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset. For Offset. select Domestic Hot Water. and for System Type. verify that the value is 9' 0''. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion.

verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected. indicating that it is now part of the cold water system. 19 On the System Tools panel. 20 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For System Name. select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets. Notice that the water main displays in blue. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view. enter DCW 107. click Finish Editing System. For Flow Conversion Method. notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. In the System Browser. Creating the Cold Water System | 253 . Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. click Edit System. 21 On the Edit System panel.

at the intersection of the water main pipe. For Slope. for Offset. connect the second toilet. press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. enter 0”/12”. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected.25 Using the same method. and click Draw Pipe. enter 3' . right-click the top DCW connector. select Water. and press Enter. 31 On the Options Bar. as shown. select 3/4''. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 30 In the plan view. 27 On the Placement Tools panel. for Offset. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink. select the sink above the urinal. enter 10'. 36 Move the cursor to the left. 34 In the plan view. 29 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Diameter. as shown. and click the connector.2 7/8''. and press Enter. 32 Move the cursor to the right. 28 In the Type Selector. click to the left of the urinal. and click to place the pipe. For Offset. 254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter 7''. enter 4'0”. 26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. under Pipe Types. 37 On the Options Bar. 33 Click Modify. 35 In the Type Selector.

43 Click the branch cold water pipe. 41 Select the top sink. select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 1'' : In. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]).39 Move the cursor to the left. 42 In the Select Connector dialog. 40 Click Modify. and click to connect to the main cold water line. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. and click OK. The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping. Creating the Cold Water System | 255 .

44 Using the same method. Creating the Hot Water System In this exercise. and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system. add a water heater. 256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . you create the hot water system. connect the middle sink to the branch pipe. 45 Close the file with or without saving it.

Design is open. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser.Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed.Plumbing Plan . Creating the Hot Water System | 257 .Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing . while pressing Ctrl.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 2 In the Project Browser.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. click Training Files. 5 In the System Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and verify that Level 1 . select the 3 sinks. and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_i.rvt. 6 In the plan view. expand the Unassigned folder.

10 In the System Browser. enter Domestic Hot Water 107. In later steps. 258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . for System Name. When designing systems. Default Domestic Cold Water. and click Edit System. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. select 0. and click OK.6 Gallon. the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). 13 In the plan view. as shown. click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. 14 Click Modify. Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. verify that DCW 107 is selected.7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. you edit the system to add equipment. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. under Water Heater .Tankless. Default Domestic Hot Water. in the Unassigned folder. a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater. 12 In the Type Selector. 15 In the System Browser.

click Finish Editing System. for Offset. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply. 26 Move the cursor to the right. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. enter 10’. and press Enter. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view. 22 In the Type Selector. 19 Select the water heater. Creating the Hot Water System | 259 . select the water heater. right-click the middle left connector. 23 On the Options Bar. Offset: 4' 6''. and select Draw Pipe.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. and on the Edit System panel. enter 1' 6''. Slope: 0''/12''. as shown. and click the water main line. specify: ■ ■ ■ Diameter: 1''. 25 On the Options Bar. 27 Click Modify. 24 Move the cursor up. 21 On the Placement Tools panel.

click Automatically Connect to switch it off. 30 On the System Tools panel. for Diameter. select a sink. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. 38 Move the cursor to the right. click Finish Editing System. and in the System Selector. 260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 37 On the Options Bar. 33 On the Edit System panel. enter 1''. right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water). and click just to the left of the cold water pipe. and press Enter. for Offset.Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater. click Edit System. enter 9' 0''. and click Draw Pipe. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater. as shown. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. select 4'-6''. select Domestic Hot Water 107. 35 On the Options Bar. 36 Move the cursor down. and on the Placement Tools panel. and for Offset. enter 1' 6''.

Creating the Hot Water System | 261 . 40 On the Options Bar. enter 2' 8''. enter 1’. 42 Click Modify. and press Enter. 41 Move the cursor down. as shown. for Offset. and click just above the bottom sink.39 Move the cursor down.

and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool. The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink.43 In the 3D view. connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe. 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal).

Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .rvt project and view the vent piping for the plumbing system. 47 Optional: Open the RME_Plumb_Design_07_i.46 Close the file with or without saving it.

264 .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system.Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial. 265 .

266 .

autodesk. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type.rvt. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_i. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. In this lesson.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. 267 .com/revitmep-documentation and download them. 2 Right-click Standard. go to http://www. you can choose to save your work. and click Duplicate. You create a new pipe type. In this tutorial. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. However. After finishing each exercise. If the tutorial training files are not present. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial.

Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. For Pipe Type.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). 5 In the Type Properties dialog. you modify the type properties of the pipe. In the left pane. 9 Click OK. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. and click Properties. However. verify that 9' 0" is selected. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. select Fire Protection Wet. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. and enter Fire Protection Wet. For System Type. For System Type. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. verify that 9' 0" is specified. or architectural components. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. 6 In the Project Browser. you create project parameters and work with schedules. For Offset. duct. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. For Pipe Type. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. click Rename. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. In the next exercise. select Fire Protection Wet. select Carbon Steel. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. structural beams. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. For Offset. under Mechanical. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. Next. In this exercise. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. select Main. for Material. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. and then click OK.

rvt. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data.Fire Protection Plan . select space Instruction 221 as shown. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. For Group parameter under. click Training Files. click Add. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_i. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . under Fire Protection. indicating that it’s the active view. select Fire Protection. enter Zone 1. select the upper half of the building. and click Element Properties. the space crossing lines display. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. 6 In the drawing area.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . When you highlight a space using the cursor. Under Categories.Design is highlighted. enter Sprinkler Zone. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. for Name. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . 8 Using a crossing window. for Sprinkler Zone.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 5 Click OK twice. and then click OK. select Spaces. right-click. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters.

under Fire Protection. and click OK. and then click OK. including a calculated value parameter. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. to which you add various parameters. and then access instance properties. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise.rvt. enter Zone 2. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. select Zone 1. you create schedules for sprinkler design. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . In the left pane of the Open dialog.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 10 In the Filter dialog. and then click OK. under Fire Protection. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_i. click Training Files. verify that only Spaces are selected. 13 Using the same method. for Sprinkler Zone. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. for Sprinkler Zone.

enter 15. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. enter Light. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . select Fire Protection. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 10 In the Format dialog. 15 In the new row: ■ ■ In the Protection Area Type column. select Spaces. enter Protection Area Construction Type. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. double-click on each column separator. indicating that it’s the active view. Select Schedule keys. click Add Parameter. For Type of Parameter. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and click Field Format. enter Maximum Spacing. select To the nearest 1'.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog.Fire Protection Plan . select Length. select Feet and fractional inches. 7 Click OK. For Rounding. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. Obstructed-Combustible. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. In the Maximum Spacing column. select Maximum Spacing. 14 Select the new header. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. For Key name. For Name. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. Click OK. 6 Using the same method. and on the ribbon. 11 Click OK twice. click the Formatting tab. Click OK.Design is highlighted. 9 On the Formatting tab. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. The schedule displays. For Units. for Name. For Group parameter under.

Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. select Spaces. NOTE The units of measure display automatically. Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. Click OK. Unobstructed Extra. enter 130. and press Enter. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. under Available fields. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing 15' Maximum Coverage Area 200 SF 15' 12' 12' 12' 15' 15' 200 SF 90 SF 90 SF 90 SF 130 SF 130 SF 15' 130 SF Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 16 Using the same method.■ In the Maximum Coverage Area column. Unobstructed Ordinary. enter Sprinkler Schedule. For Name.

In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. select Number. and click Field Format. select 0 decimal place. and click OK. For Formula. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). enter Minimum Sprinklers. For Units. Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. select Area. for Sorting/Grouping. For Discipline. Click OK.■ ■ ■ ■ Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing Click Calculated Value. For Type. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. For Then by. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. click . and click View Properties. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. Enter the formula operator / after Area. 19 Click the Formatting tab. 20 On the Formatting tab. select Fixed. select Sprinkler Zone. 22 Click OK twice. select Level. The Sprinkler Schedule displays. for Sort by. select Common. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. Select Header and Blank line. under Other. click Edit. select Minimum Sprinklers. For Rounding. In the Fields dialog. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings.

At the bottom of the dialog. select Number. select Minimum Sprinklers. select Level equals Level 2. select Grand totals. 26 Click OK 3 times. for Filter by. click Edit. and then click Field Format.■ ■ ■ ■ Select Header and Blank line. and click View Properties. select Level. For Fields. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. For Then by (second instance). Under Field formatting. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. and select Totals only. and then select Hidden field. For Fields. 27 In the drawing area. for Filter. select Sprinkler Zone. select Hidden field. verify that Use default settings is selected. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . ■ In the Format dialog. 30 Click OK twice. right-click the schedule.

32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. delete the word Maximum. and click View Properties. for Fields. select Grand totals. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 .The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. For Category. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. for Available fields. double-click Type. select Calculate totals. and select Totals only. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. System Name. On the Formatting tab. click Edit. under Other. for Embedded Schedule. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. and Count. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. select Embedded Schedule. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Count. select Sprinklers. Under Field formatting. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area.

for Protection Area Construction Type. Unobstructed. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. 41 In the plan view. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. select Ordinary. but their values are not determined. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. Unobstructed.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and click OK. click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. select space 221 Instruction. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. As a result.Fire Protection Plan Design. 52 Click OK. double-click FP . 43 Click Cancel. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. under Identity Data. under Identity Data. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. under Identity Data.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. 46 With the space still selected. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. select Ordinary. select Light. 50 Access the instance properties. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. for Protection Area Construction Type. and the spacing parameter values are evident. select space 221 Instruction. and access the instance properties. Unobstructed. 48 In the floor plan. 44 In the schedule.

53 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .

278 .

As you create the system. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded.autodesk. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. you will understand the process. By following the recommended workflow.com/revitmep-documentation and download them.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 279 . you can choose to save your work.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. As you place the sprinklers. After finishing each exercise. If the tutorial training files are not present. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. and double-click Level 2 . The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. go to http://www. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. click Training Files. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial. At the end of this tutorial. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_i. methodology. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family. However.

4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. 3 In the Project Browser. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. When there is a small misalignment. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. After placing the initial sprinkler. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. When this happens. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view.

because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers. and select Sprinkler . because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. as shown. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. 11 In the drawing area. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. and click to place 3 sprinklers.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 203 and 204. 10 Press Esc twice. 9 In space Instruction 202.Semi-Recessed Hosted : 1/2" Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. while pressing Ctrl. select the sprinklers that you placed. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202.Pendent .

the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. Also. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. 15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. Next. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. 13 On the Options Bar. as shown. verify that Constrain is cleared.12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. you place non-hosted sprinklers. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and that Copy and Multiple are selected. and then press Esc.

25 Click OK. you place non-hosted sprinklers. 23 Right-click the sprinkler. and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. 22 In the 200A Corridor space. Notice that the schedule updates. Because the sprinkler is not hosted. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. move the cursor to the right. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. you adjust the offset. enter 11. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 16 Close the ceiling plan view.FP_Ceiling view. 29 Press Esc. under Constraints. Adding Sprinklers | 283 . click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. for Offset. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. and press Enter. 18 Type WT. 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. 17 In the Project Browser. enter 10' 6". 200B. and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. Next. open Design ➤ FP . 19 In the floor plan. and select Sprinkler-Upright : 1/2" Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Design. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. For Number. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0' 0". click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. specify a vertical offset. enter 14' 6".Fire Protection Plan . This number is determined in the schedule. and click Element Properties. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. and 200C).Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 .

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. indicating that it’s the active view.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .rvt. Unlike logical connections (systems). you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. click Training Files. However. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection).30 Close the file with or without saving it. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP.Fire Protection Plan . and then creating the logical connection between these system components. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . In the next exercise. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. After creating the logical connection.Design is highlighted. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_i. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . In this exercise. Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and with piping (physical connection).

named Fire Protection Wet. and select Piping. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. As you assign sprinklers to systems. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. 5 Right-click the header. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. Creating a Piping System | 285 . click View ➤ Systems.2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet 1 system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. within the Piping Systems folder. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. In the System Browser. as shown. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. 8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow.

expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. place the cursor over a sprinkler. double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the list of sprinklers. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name.Wet is selected. 19 Click OK. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. enter FP Wet_Zone2. verify that Main is selected. select an initial piping layout. Next. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. select Branch. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping.Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. for System Name. verify that 9' 0" is specified. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. In the left pane. 15 In the drawing area. 13 In the System Browser. press Tab. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. 11 With the system still selected. The Edit Piping System panel displays. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. and a piping layout preview displays. and select the system. providing system editing tools. click Settings. system equipment. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. For Pipe Type. and click Select. For Offset. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. 12 On the Options Bar. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. The Generate Layout tools are activated. and on the Options Bar. and number of elements in the system. 14 Click Finish Editing System. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above level 2. indicating the logical connection.

(elbow control) Creating a Piping System | 287 . 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. In general. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. verify that Network is selected.20 On the Generate Layout panel. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. enter -12' 0". these settings will convert the base component to a 2" riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (9' 0"). for Diameter. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. and green represents branch lines). click Solutions. Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. and select solution 5. as shown. select 2". the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. When the layout is finished. 25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. click Place Base. 24 On the Generate Layout panel. 22 On the Options Bar. 23 For Offset.

■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. click Modify. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. 28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. On the Generate Layout panel. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. 29 Click Finish Layout. as shown. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . A (parallel movement control) displays.

and then you create piping to physically connect them. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. the Connect Into tool. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. and various manual pipe creation tools. Either relocate the system components.IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. or that offset elevations are incorrect. select a different layout solution. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . 32 If necessary. Next. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. or manually modify the pipe. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP .

and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_i. 1 In the Project Browser. 3 If necessary.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Zoom in. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and select the elbow fitting as shown. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. click Training Files. 4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee.Fire Protection Plan .Design is highlighted.

Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 3 sprinklers. and pipe or duct is created. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). 14 Close the System Browser. air terminals. 9 On the Edit System panel. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. and so on) are logically connected by a system. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. 5 In the drawing area. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). or a system component to display system tools. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . 12 On the Options Bar. click Add To System. for Solution Type. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. radiators. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. and select solution 5. verify that Solutions is selected. 8 In the corridor. 13 Click Finish Layout. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. you can select the pipe or duct. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. click Finish Editing System. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. verify that Network is selected. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. 11 On the Generate Layout panel. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the 3 spaces at the right end of the corridor. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar.The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. 18 Click Finish Editing System. mechanical equipment.

Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 27 On the Options Bar. 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . draw pipe from the last unconnected sprinkler to the main pipe. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. 24 In the Piping Plan. 28 In the drawing area. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. right-click. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. and then tile the views. 29 Using the same method. and click Draw Pipe. 23 View the result in the 3D view. 25 Select the sprinkler. 21 In the Piping Plan. for Offset. and then press Esc. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection .20 Open Design ➤ FP . and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. select 9'.

it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 293 .Layout in 2D Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. Because the whole system highlights. 31 In the plan view. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system.

Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area. click Training Files. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . indicating that it’s the active view. select 1/4" = 1'-0".Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. for Scale.Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise.Design is highlighted. ■ 6 Press Esc.Fire Protection Plan . Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_i. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint. double-click on the section head to open the section view. 4 On the Options Bar.

8 Right-click, and click View Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Graphics, for Sub-Discipline, select FP - Design. For View Classification, select Design. Under Identity Data, for View Name, enter FP Section_Stair. For Default View Template, select MEP Section. Click OK.

10 In the Project Browser, right-click Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair, and click Apply Default View Template. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. 12 If necessary, drag the top section boundary line up. 13 Select the elbow fitting, and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. 14 Select the tee fitting, and then right-click the top connector, and click Draw Pipe. 15 Press Spacebar. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel, and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection - Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Move the cursor up, enter 7', and press Enter.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295

18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 19 Make Level 2 - Fire Protection Plan - Design the active view. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel, and select M_Hose Reel Cabinet Surface Mounted : 1"25mm from the drop-down list. 22 In the drawing area, click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown, and then click Modify.

23 In the section view, zoom to the hose reel cabinet. 24 Select the cabinet, right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet, and click Draw Pipe.

296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

25 Verify that Fire Protection - Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 26 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 2"50mm. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is active. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps), and then click Modify.

29 Close the section view. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 31 In the alert dialog, click Yes to load a family. 32 In the Open dialog, navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Gate Valve - 2-12 Inch.rfa, and click Open. 33 In the Type Selector, verify that Gate Valve - 2" is selected. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet, as shown, and then click Modify.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297

A 2" gate valve is placed in the 2" diameter pipe.

35 Open 3D Fire Protection, and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D.

36 Close the file with or without saving it.

298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modifying Pipe Diameters
In this exercise, you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers, you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_i.rvt.

Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views, and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view.

NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter, height, or width. Changing the diameter, width, or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter, width, or height. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers, and because the design specifications require a 1 inch diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers, it’s more efficient to specify 1 inch diameter for all pipe runs, and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. 4 In the floor plan view, starting at the lower left corner of the wing, draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet).

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299

5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 6 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Pipe Fittings and Pipes, and click OK. 7 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 1". 8 Click Modify. All selected piping is now 1" diameter.

Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view, zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. 12 If necessary, click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog, . 13 Navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Pipe Size Tag.rfa, and click Open. 14 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Verify that Horizontal is selected. Clear Leader.

15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown, and after each segment highlights, click to place the tag. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments.

NOTE Tags are view specific. They display only in the view in which they were placed. Press Esc.

300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view, select the linked architectural file. 17 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. By hiding the linked file, you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. 18 In the 3D view, select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet.

19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler, and when the section highlights, press Tab. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segement. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. The main piping is selected and displays in red.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301

for Diameter. 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . select 4". The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes.21 On the Options Bar.

24 In the drawing area. for Diameter.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 26 Using the same method. 25 On the Options Bar. select 1 1/4". change the diameter of the other top segments to 1 1/4" to accommodate sprinklers. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 202 (next to the stairs). and maximize the floor plan. The pipe diameter is modified. Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . as shown. and then tag the piping as shown. 23 Close the 3D view.

you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. 28 Close the file with or without saving it.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. In this exercise.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. For additional practice. You added tags to pipes. In this tutorial. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. 304 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_i. you created a wet fire protection system.

and create schedules for construction documentation for a project. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views. add annotations and dimensions. 305 . create details.Documenting a Project In this tutorial.

306 .

You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. 2 In the Project Browser.rvt. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . click Training Files. and click Rename. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. dependent views. you begin the construction documentation for the building project. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_i. right-click Copy of Level 1. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and apply a view template. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. matchlines. under Floor Plans. and click OK. and click Properties. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and view references. 307 . right-click Level 1. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. If the view included detail graphics. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan.

under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1/8" = 1' scale. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller.rvt. 9 Click OK. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. create dependent views for areas B and C. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. and click Rename. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 3 In the Rename View dialog. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. 10 In the drawing area. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. 4 Using the same method. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click OK. views and put them on the sheet. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. more focused. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. and click OK. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_i. as shown. and then press Esc. 6 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. and click Apply Default View Template. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog.

13 Press Esc twice. and then press Esc. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. Creating Dependent Views | 309 . select 11. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. For Line Pattern. on the Options Bar./ ---). For Line Weight. 14 Click Finish Matchline. for Target view. click the current value. 21 Using the same method. and click OK. In the Color dialog. 20 Select the upper view reference and. 19 In the drawing area. Click OK. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references (displayed as . 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. select black. select Double Dash 5/8".

as shown. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. 27 Using the same method. and zoom to each of the view references. crop the dependent views for plans B and C. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it.22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 25 Using the same method.

3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. 4 In the Project Browser. press Tab twice to highlight the pipe run. and select the section box.Domestic Water. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. right-click Plumbing Isometric . and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_i. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . For Sub-Discipline. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. select Plumbing. 2 Zoom in. select Plumbing Isometric. and click Properties. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. For Default View Template. for View Name. and click to select it.29 Close the file with or without saving it. right-click 3D Plumbing. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 8 Highlight a segment of the top horizontal piping. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 7 Zoom in to the plumbing system. select Documentation.Domestic Water. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. Under Graphics. click Training Files. for View Classification. The section crop lines no longer display.rvt. enter Plumbing Isometric . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. 6 In the Project Browser. Click OK. and click Apply Default View Template.

change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dash Dot 3/16". 11 Select the vertical segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. select 3. 12 Using the same method. and then click OK. Click Apply. 10 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. select Dash. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. The selected piping displays as a dashed line. and click to select it. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . press Tab 3 times.9 Right-click. For Pattern.

This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights. as shown). and click to select it. and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. 14 Right-click.13 Highlight a segment of horizontal pipe below the sinks. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 .

On the View Control Bar. press Tab 3 times. Right-click. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate the Plumbing Isometric . On the View Control Bar. and rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . click Close Reveal Hidden Elements.Sanitary Waste. click Reveal Hidden Elements. Unhide the sanitary waste piping: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the View Control Bar. and click to select it.15 Press Esc. Click in the drawing area to start a text label. highlight a segment of the sanitary piping. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label. 17 Label the fixtures as shown. ■ ■ ■ Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping. 18 Using methods learned previously. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. In the drawing area.Domestic Water view with detailing. and click Unhide in view ➤ Elements.

20 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Discipline. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. and then place the callout view on a sheet. verify that Common is selected. for Rounding. select To the nearest 1/8". When the view is associated with a sheet. and click to place the spot slope annotation. 25 Press Esc twice. 23 Click on the horizontal pipe below the sinks to select it. click on the Format value. For Slope. 24 Move the cursor above the pipe. 21 Click OK twice. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. as shown. In the Format dialog. Creating Callout Views | 315 . you use a plan view to create a callout view.Add a spot slope annotation 19 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. 26 Close the file with or without saving it.

3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_i. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. indicating that it’s the active view. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . select 1/4"=1'-0''. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down. 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. 2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom section of the plan). Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). click Training Files. for Scale. beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. 5 On the Options Bar.

drag it to the sheet.HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). for Line Weight. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. ■ Expand the Callout Boundary category and. Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. 13 In the Project Browser. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ For the Callout Boundary category. select 5. double-click M601 . using the same method. Click OK. Creating Callout Views | 317 .8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles.

and click Apply Default View Template. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. For Title on Sheet. 15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for View Name. For Default View Template. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. and select the viewport. 17 In the Project Browser. enter WSHP PART PLAN. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. Ductwork in coarse detail 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. right-click the callout view. Click OK.

20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 214 Section.Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information. 19 Zoom in to the area near the central stairs and section markers. Creating Callout Views | 319 .

right-click the detail view. and click OK. 24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. under Names. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. 25 In the Project Browser. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. and click Rename. and click OK. 26 In the Rename View dialog. and click Apply View Template. enter Typical WSHP Detail. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down.21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail.

and annotation to create a legend. duct tags. 321 . ■ create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. linetypes. symbols. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. ■ work with model-based components. you learn how to: ■ add text notes.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson.

6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles.Creating Annotations In this exercise. 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 322 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . as shown. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_i. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 8 With the text still selected. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center).rvt. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. click Training Files. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS.

Use the leader segment grips to create horizontal leader segments from the text box. and then click Right Straight. as shown. verify that Leader is cleared. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Creating Annotations | 323 . 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight. a return diffuser. select a supply diffuser. Add leaders 10 Select the text box. 15 On the Options Bar. a segment of round duct. and a segment of rectangular duct. 16 In the drawing area.9 Press Esc twice. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection.

and click Open. select Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. click Load. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. If necessary.The information on each tag varies according to the category of element.rfa and Flex Duct Tag Round. for Ducts. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 21 In the Load Family dialog. under Category.rfa. move diffuser tags off the ductwork. 20 In the Tags dialog. 22 In the Tags dialog. tag the remaining diffusers in the area. 24 On the Options Bar. 17 Click Modify. and click OK. verify that the Loaded Tag is Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. clear Leader. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method.

select Horizontal. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 32 In the drawing area. 26 On the Options Bar. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. Leader. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. 31 On the Options Bar. Creating Annotations | 325 . specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. and Attached End. and then press Esc.25 In the drawing area. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. as shown.

select Free End. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .33 On the Options Bar. as shown. 34 In the drawing area. 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point to place the leader as shown. for Leader. click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor.

for Leader Arrowhead. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. That’s because you changed a type property. select Dot Open 1/16". Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. and all elements of that type are affected. and lock lighting fixtures. Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. 37 In the drawing area. 40 Using the method learned previously. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. select the last tag placed. not simply an instance property. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. Creating Dimensions | 327 . lay out. you use temporary dimensions to locate. and click OK.36 Press Esc twice.

328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . click Training Files. 12 Press Esc. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. On the Options Bar.rvt. 5 Click to create a permanent dimension. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_i. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. In the left pane of the Open dialog. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. and then select the interior face of the wall. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. indicating that it’s the active view. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. select the dimension line.

lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. enter 8'. linework. and press Enter. and notes. Creating a Legend | 329 . 18 Select the dimension value (7' . Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 17 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. annotation symbols. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 15 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. 19 Using the same methods.3 1/2"). click the 3 interior locks on the line. Lock dimensions between fixtures 14 Select the center dimension line. 16 Press Esc. and offset them 8' from the wall.13 Using the same method. Creating a Legend In this exercise. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. Because the dimensions are locked.

8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family. Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_i. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. select 1/4" = 1' -0". click Training Files. ■ 9 In the drawing area. select Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. select Floor Plan. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . 5 Click in the drawing area. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component. Click OK.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 . and select 1/4" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down.Sidewall : 18 x 8 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.rvt. enter Diffuser Legend. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel.8 Neck. For Scale. For View. click below the title to place the diffuser.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 10 Using the same method.

Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. click next to the top diffuser. Creating a Legend | 331 . 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel.11 Press Esc. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. 14 In the drawing area. and select 1/8" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list.

open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. The selected detail lines are now thin. and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 26 Press Esc. 27 While pressing Ctrl.DROP and its text note. 24 Select the component’s break line. select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component. 22 Zoom in to the copied component. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE . 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line. select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE .RISE symbol for the copy start point. and then press Esc.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. 21 Press Esc. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component.

Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. 35 Change the text on the right to N. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. and then click Modify. 34 Using the method learned previously. 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down.MECHANICAL LEGEND. 33 Click to the left of the left break line. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component. Creating a Legend | 333 .30 Select Spot Elevation . and then click Modify. and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT. enter E.

and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 41 Close the file with or without saving it.39 With the viewport still selected. click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 40 Press Esc.

and text. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. A drafting view using detail components.rvt.113 East elevation view. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_i. 335 . Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. detail groups. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram.Detailing 15 In this lesson. In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. A detail callout that references another view. click Training Files. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser .

5 In the drawing area. and then modify and align the views. place Power Riser . Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser. 7 Drag the Power Riser . select each of the 2 panelboards. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. and click to place it. clear Leader.113 East on the sheet. 4 On the Options Bar.113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. Next. 336 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 8 Using the same method. Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view.

for Title on Sheet. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Select the Level 1 line. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. 13 Right-click. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. select the 113 North view. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. and click Activate View.9 Press Esc. giving the appearance of a single view. right-click. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 337 . and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. under Identity Data. and click OK. and click Deactivate View. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog.

338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 22 Press Esc. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. select the 113 East elevation view. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. and click Activate View. 19 Select the Level 1 line. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. right-click. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 21 Using the drag control. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. you add wiring to the diagram. In the next exercise. right-click. as shown.

as shown. select 6. click New. As you draw. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. and then click OK. 9 Beginning at the transformer. Under Modify Subcategories. 2 Close the Project Browser.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. for Line Weight. enter Electrical Power. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. expand Lines. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB).Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. 8 On the Options Bar. Creating Detail Wiring | 339 .rvt. click Training Files. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. verify that Chain is selected. In the New Subcategory dialog. for Name. and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. In the Line Styles dialog.113 North view. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_i. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. notice that there are no snaps active. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. indicating that it’s the active view.

12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. enter 1/8". 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 13 On the Options Bar. 11 Using the same method. add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3). for Offset. as shown. 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard.10 Press Esc.

18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. you select the portion of the line that you want to keep. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 . TIP When you use the Trim tool.15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. so that the result is as shown. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line.

342 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B. and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram. Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once.20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown.

24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). 25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. and select 3/32" Arial Transparent from the Type Selector drop-down. Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 .22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 28 Click above the cap. 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 29 Click Modify. and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. as shown. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader.

select Multiple. select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol.31 While pressing Ctrl. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints. 33 On the Options Bar. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point.

37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 42 On the Options Bar.36 Press Esc. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. and then press Esc. 39 Move the cursor to the right. for Offset.5. enter 0 0. and press Enter. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 . 40 Press Esc. You enter exact values for each line length. enter 3/32". 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard.

and press Enter. you can ensure that they stay together. and click OK. Using the same method. expand Groups ➤ Detail. 46 In the Project Browser. Press Esc. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately.125.25. enter Ground. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. and then press Esc. enter 0 0. 47 In the drawing area. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. for Name. click on the length dimension value. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. select all 3 lines. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. change the length of the bottom line to 0 0. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing . while pressing Ctrl. 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. 50 With the group selected. Notice that the new Ground group displays in the Project Browser.44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line.

TP-2B. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. 54 Select the group.51 Using the method learned previously. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . 52 Select the detail group. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point.

for Name.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. and will place it on sheet E01. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. and click Rename. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. 4 Right-click the ViewCube. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport. and click OK. you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 59 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_i. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. 2 Right-click the copy. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. In later exercises. 5 Zoom in to view the section. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . click Training Files. 3 In the Rename View dialog.rvt.

Back. 7 On the ViewCube. and Left sides converge. and then click the corner where the Top. and then press Esc. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 .6 Select the section box. click Home. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor.

13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail.Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. You hide this duct because it’s not part of the detail being created. Hide elements in a view 10 Select the long rectangular duct at the rear. and click Apply View Template. select 3D HVAC Iso. Click OK. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. Walkthroughs. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. right-click. Under Names. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 9 In the View Templates dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Show Type. select 3D Views. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components.

Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: 18 Press Esc. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected.14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. Typical. Move the cursor down and to the left. Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. 15 Using the same method. Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. as shown. 19 Complete the text labels. (Right). and click to specify the second leader point. label the connecting duct 8x8 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper).

and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. 25 Click OK. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. as shown. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 23 Click on the crop region. 24 Access the instance properties for the view. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area.To rotate and reposition a text label. and under Extents. select Crop Region Visible. under Extents. and then click OK. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog.

right-click the view name. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. and click Properties. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 3 In the Project Browser. For Scale. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_i. Click OK. select the isometric view. Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. click Training Files. and then select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. Place a detail component. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes.29 In the drawing area. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. Use detail lines to create a detail group.rvt. select 3" = 1'-0".

Click OK. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. for Sub-Discipline. 14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 1' 8" x 5 1/2". select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. as the rectangle start point. 13 In the drawing area. Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. click the point at the top of the drain. select Documentation. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region.4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. and select Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. as shown. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select Plumbing. 12 On the Element panel. 9 Zoom in to the component. For View Classification. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component.

select the filled region. and then press Esc.P. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region. Concrete.I. 22 Click Modify.15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties. Drafting Detail Components | 355 . Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. select C. 18 With the filled region still selected. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. (Line). 20 Select 1. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group. 23 In the drawing area. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click OK. for Type. 21 In the drawing area. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back.

35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. and then click to select them. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line.28 Click Modify. select Multiple. 30 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 34 Press Esc. and then click point 6 as the endpoint. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 31 On the Options Bar.

39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. 45 Using the method learned previously. 41 Type ZF to zoom out. and then select the side of the slab above the line.38 Pan to the other end of the slab. and then press Esc. 40 Click Finish Region. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. Drafting Detail Components | 357 . Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. as shown. (Rectangle).

for Name. press Tab to highlight the chain.. select the Flashing Membrane group.Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. as shown. 49 Click Modify. 54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. enter Flashing Membrane_F. 52 In the Create Group dialog. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines.D. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. and click OK. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center. draw wide detail lines as shown. and then click to select them. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group.

57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. 58 Select Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. 61 Using the same method. as shown. Drafting Detail Components | 359 .55 Press Esc. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly.

as shown. 72 If necessary. select Division 22 ➤ 22 13 00 ➤ 22 13 16 ➤ 22 13 16. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 70 In the Keynotes dialog. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline.A1 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. 67 On the Options Bar. 64 Press Esc twice. and use the grips to resize the masking region. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. select Leader and Free End. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. select the keynote and drag the text to the right. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. 71 Click Modify. and then click OK.62 Press Esc twice.

and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 4” Flange. and click to specify the text insertion point. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown.Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). 81 Select the text note. 80 Press Esc twice. and click to specify the second leader point. 78 Move the cursor to the left. 76 To select the leader start point.

Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references. 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. as shown. 362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . click to select the slab lines in the order indicated. 84 Using the following image as a guide.82 Continue annotating the detail.

Plumbing Part Plans & Details. 90 Press Esc. select the view title. and click to place it. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet. and then press Esc twice. 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. open P103 . Drafting Detail Components | 363 . Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser.85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. 88 In the drawing area. 91 Close the file with or without saving it.

For Import units. 7 On the Imported Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. Click OK. select 3. 364 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select Black and White. Click Open. 6 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. expand Roof Drains Overflow Imperial. double-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Plumbing ➤ Drafting Views (Detail) ➤ Roof Drain Overflow Detail to make it the active view. select Auto-Detect. and modify line weight properties in the imported drawing. Modify the CAD drawing line weight 5 Zoom to the left side of the detail. Import a CAD detail drawing 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Visible. for Line Weight. 2 Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Import CAD. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_05_i. and select Roof Drain Overflow Imperial.dwg. ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Type ZF to zoom the view. you import a CAD detail drawing. For Layers. For A-----NPP. 3 In the Import CAD Formats dialog: ■ Navigate to Training\Imperial\06_Construction Documentation. For Colors.Importing a CAD Drawing In this exercise.rvt. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

13 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. 12 In the drawing area. 10 Drag Roof Drain Overflow Detail from the Project Browser to the upper right of the sheet. and then press Esc. select the viewport title. and select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. Place the detail on a sheet 9 In the Project Browser. 14 Drag the title to the small space below the viewport. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. 11 Press Esc. open P103 .8 Type ZF. Importing a CAD Drawing | 365 .

366 .